Sie sind auf Seite 1von 238

Intenso TAB 714

Long Manual

V1.2

Bedienungsanleitung TAB 714


Vielen Dank, dass Sie sich fr das TAB714 entschieden haben. Folgen Sie bitte dieser Anleitung, um
ber die wichtigsten Funktionen des Gertes informiert zu werden.

1.) Inhaltsverzeichnis
1.) Inhaltsverzeichnis .................................................................................................................................................................................. 1
2.) Hinweise ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 2
3.) Gerteberblick ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 4
4.) Packungsinhalt ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4
5.) Laden des Akkus ................................................................................................................................................................................... 5
6.) Nutzung einer Micro SD/SDHC Karte .................................................................................................................................................... 5
7.) bertragung von Daten zwischen dem Gert und einem Computer ..................................................................................................... 5
8.) Touchscreen .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 6
9.) Der Startbildschirm ................................................................................................................................................................................ 7
Ansicht ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 7
Entsperren des Displays ............................................................................................................................................................................. 7
Statusleiste ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 7
Anpassung des Startbildschirms ................................................................................................................................................................. 8
Verschiedene Startbildschirme nutzen........................................................................................................................................................ 9
Vorinstallierte Anwendungen auf dem Startbildschirm ................................................................................................................................ 9
a) Suchleiste fr die Google Suche ....................................................................................................................................................... 10
b) Anwendungsbersicht .......................................................................................................................................................................... 10
c) Wettervorschau ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 11
d) WIFI ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 11
Automatische Verbindung ......................................................................................................................................................................... 11
Manuelle Verbindung ................................................................................................................................................................................ 12
e) Galerie .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 12
f) Musik ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 13
g) Video .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 15
h) App Center ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 15
i) Web Browser ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 15
Nutzung der virtuellen Tastatur ................................................................................................................................................................. 15
Eingabe von Sonderzeichen ..................................................................................................................................................................... 16
Nutzung des Web Browsers ..................................................................................................................................................................... 16
j) Anwendungsbersicht............................................................................................................................................................................ 17
k) System Einstellungen ........................................................................................................................................................................... 17
Einstellungsbersicht ................................................................................................................................................................................ 18
10.) Versand / Empfang von E-Mails ........................................................................................................................................................ 19
Einrichtung Ihres E-Mail Postfaches ......................................................................................................................................................... 19
Verwaltung der E-Mail Accounts ............................................................................................................................................................... 20
Anzeige von E-Mail Nachrichten ............................................................................................................................................................... 20
Schreiben von E-Mail Nachrichten............................................................................................................................................................ 20
11.) Verwaltung von Anwendungen .......................................................................................................................................................... 21
Installation von Anwendungen .................................................................................................................................................................. 21
Deinstallation von Anwendungen .............................................................................................................................................................. 21
12.) Datei Manager ................................................................................................................................................................................... 22
Durch Dateien und Ordner navigieren ...................................................................................................................................................... 22
Die Toolbar nutzen.................................................................................................................................................................................... 22
Dateien und Ordner kopieren, verschieben und umbenennen.................................................................................................................. 23
13.) Lesen von Office Dokumenten .......................................................................................................................................................... 23
14.) Task Manager .................................................................................................................................................................................... 24
15.) Eingeschrnkte Garantiebedingungen............................................................................................................................................... 24
16.) Technische Daten .............................................................................................................................................................................. 25
17.) Wartung des Gertes......................................................................................................................................................................... 25
18.) Suberung des Gertes..................................................................................................................................................................... 25
19.) Entsorgung von Elektro-Altgerten .................................................................................................................................................... 25
20.) Lizenzinformation............................................................................................................................................................................... 26
EG Konformittserklrung ............................................................................................................................................................................ 30

DE - 1

Dieses Handbuch enthlt unter Umstnden nicht alle Funktionen Ihres Gertes. Fr die Nutzung von Anwendungen die von
Drittanbietern stammen, kontaktieren Sie bitte den Anbieter. Bitte beachten Sie, dass alle Angaben ohne vorherige
Ankndigung gendert werden knnen. Aktuelle Informationen finden Sie unter www.intenso.de
Markenzeichen
Google, das Google-Logo und Android sind Marken von Google. Alle anderen Produkt- oder Servicenamen sind
Eigentum ihrer jeweiligen Inhaber.

2.) Hinweise

Vermeiden Sie einen harten Aufprall des Gertes. Legen Sie es nicht auf schrge Flchen, um
einen Sturz des Gertes zu vermeiden.

Verwenden Sie das Gert nicht in extrem kalten, heien, feuchten oder staubigen Gebieten.
Setzen Sie es ebenfalls keinen direkten Sonnenstrahlen aus.

Vermeiden Sie die Nutzung auf sandigen Pltzen.

Verwenden Sie das Gert nicht in explosionsgefhrdeten Umgebungen, wie zum Beispiel an
den Zapfsulen einer Tankstelle.

Vermeiden Sie die Benutzung auf Kissen, Sofas oder anderen Gegenstnden, die eine
Wrmeentwicklung untersttzen, da die Gefahr einer berhitzung des Gertes besteht.

Fhren Sie hufiger Datensicherungen durch, um einen mglichen Datenverlust zu vermeiden.


Wir sind nicht haftbar fr einen eventuellen Datenverlust.

Trennen Sie die Verbindung nicht, wenn Daten bertragen werden oder das Gert formatiert
wird. Dies kann zu Datenverlust fhren.

Bilder und Filme knnen durch Rechte Dritter geschtzt sein. Das Abspielen ohne Lizenz kann
Copyright Rechte verletzen.

Vermeiden Sie das Benutzen in stark magnetisierten Feldern.

Schtzen Sie das Gert vor Nsse. Wenn Feuchtigkeit in das Gert eintritt, schalten Sie es bitte
unverzglich aus, danach subern und trocknen Sie bitte das Gert.

Verwenden Sie bitte keine chemischen Lsungen, um das Gert zu subern. Hier bitte nur ein
trockenes Tuch verwenden.
Keine offenen Flammen, beispielsweise angezndete Kerzen, in die Nhe oder auf dem Gert
platzieren.
Wir sind nicht haftbar fr Schden bei einer Fehlfunktion, fr Datenverlust, fehlerhafter
Handhabung, eigenhndiger Reparatur des Gerts oder Wechseln des Akkus.

Sollte das Gert einmal nicht auf Ihre Eingaben reagieren, benutzen Sie bitte den Reset-Knopf
auf der Rckseite des Gertes, um es neu zu starten.

Bei Nichtverwendung trennen Sie bitte das Netzteil von der Stromversorgung.

Die Steckdose muss sich in der Nhe des Gertes befinden und leicht zugnglich sein.

Betreiben Sie den Netzadapter nur an geerdeten Steckdosen mit AC 100-240V~, 50/60 Hz.
Wenn Sie sich der Stromversorgung am Aufstellungsort nicht sicher sind, fragen Sie beim
betreffenden Energieversorger nach.
DE - 2

Benutzen Sie nur das beiliegende Netzadapter- und Netzanschlusskabel.

Um die Stromversorgung zu Ihrem Gert zu unterbrechen, ziehen Sie das Netzteil aus der
Steckdose. Halten Sie beim Abziehen immer das Netzteil selbst fest. Ziehen Sie nie an der
Leitung.

ffnen Sie nicht das Gehuse des Netzadapters. Bei geffnetem Gehuse besteht
Lebensgefahr durch elektrischen Schlag. Es enthlt keine zu wartenden Teile.

Bei lngerer Nichtverwendung entldt sich der Akku des Gertes langsam. Vor der
Wiederverwendung muss dieser erneut aufgeladen werden.

Bitte beachten Sie die umweltgerechte Entsorgung des Gertes oder des Akkus.

Bitte zerlegen Sie das Gert nicht in Einzelteile, und versuchen Sie bitte nicht, es selbst zu
reparieren, da die Garantie in diesem Fall erlischt.

Nutzen Sie das Gert nicht an Orten, wo die Nutzung von Mobilgerten verboten ist. Nutzen Sie
das Gert nicht in der Nhe anderer elektronischer Gerte, da es durch die
Hochfrequenzsignale zu Strungen kommen kann.

Nutzen Sie das Gert nicht in der Nhe eines Schrittmachers, in einem Krankenhaus oder in der
Nhe medizinischer Gerte, da es durch die Hochfrequenzsignale zu Strungen kommen kann.
Halten Sie mindestens 15cm Abstand von einem Schrittmacher. Wenden Sie sich bitte an den
Hersteller dieser Gerte, um Informationen ber die gemeinsame Nutzung zu erhalten.

Bei Verwendung von Ohr- oder Kopfhrern in zu hoher Lautstrke kann es zu einer dauerhaften
Schdigung des Gehrs kommen.

Aus Grnden der Verkehrssicherheit darf das Gert whrend der Fahrt nicht vom
Fahrzeugfhrer selbst bedient werden.

DE - 3

3.) Gerteberblick

1.)Ein / Aus Taste: Lange drcken, um das


Gert auszuschalten; kurz drcken, um
das Display aus dem Ruhemodus zu
reaktivieren

5.)Micro-SD Kartenslot
6.)Lautstrke +/7.)Touchscreen

2.)3.5mm Kopfhrerbuchse
8.)Front Kamera
3.)Micro-USB Buchse
4.)DC 5V 2A Eingang

4.) Packungsinhalt
Bitte berprfen Sie den Packungsinhalt auf Vollstndigkeit:

TAB 714
Stereo-Kopfhrer
USB Kabel
Netzteil 5V 2.0A
Bedienungsanleitung
USB Dongle

DE - 4

5.) Laden des Akkus


Bitte laden Sie den Akku des Gertes vor der ersten Benutzung vollstndig auf. Verbinden Sie
dazu das beiliegende Netzteil mit dem Gert und einer Steckdose. Das vollstndige Laden dauert
ca. 5 Stunden.
Der Ladezustand wird Ihnen whrend des Betriebes in der Statusleiste angezeigt. Bei aktivierter
Displaysperre wird Ihnen der aktuelle Ladezustand in Prozent angezeigt.
Im ausgeschalteten Zustand wird Ihnen bei kurzem Druck auf einer der Tasten ein Batteriesymbol im
Display angezeigt. Whrend des Ladevorganges wird durch eine Animation ein fllen der Batterie in
mehreren Stufen dargestellt. Ist der Akku vollstndig geladen, endet die Animation und die Batterie
wird vollstndig angezeigt.

Hinweise:
a. Bei 15% verbleibender Restleistung des Akkus erhalten Sie eine Warnmeldung auf das Display. Sie sollten das Gert nun zum
Aufladen des Akkus ber das Netzteil mit einer Steckdose verbinden, um eventuellen Datenverlust zu vermeiden und die
Lebensdauer des Akkus zu erhhen.
b. Sie knnen das Gert nutzen, whrend Sie die Batterie aufladen. Um eine langanhaltende Batterie-Lebensdauer zu gewhrleisten,
bitten wir Sie, das Gert nicht zu nutzen.
c. Um eine gute Performance zu gewhrleisten, muss der eingebaute Akku hufig genutzt werden. Wenn Sie das Gert nur selten
gebrauchen, laden Sie den Akku bitte mindestens einmal im Monat vollstndig auf.
d. Stellen Sie sicher, dass Sie nur das mitgelieferte Netzteil zum Aufladen benutzen.

6.) Nutzung einer Micro SD/SDHC Karte


Dieses Gert kann Daten direkt von einer Micro SD/SDHC Karte lesen.
Um eine Micro SD/SDHC Karte zu nutzen, stecken Sie bitte die Karte in das dafr vorgesehene Fach
auf der Unterseite des Gertes (I). Nutzen Sie den vorinstallierten Explorer, um auf die auf der
Speicherkarte vorhandenen Daten zuzugreifen. Bitte whlen Sie hierzu im Explorer das
Verzeichnis SD Card aus.

7.) bertragung von Daten zwischen dem Gert und einem Computer
1.) Verbinden Sie das Gert mit Hilfe des beiliegenden USB Kabels mit einem Computer.
2.) Auf dem Gert wird nun der Bildschirm fr die USB Verbindung angezeigt. Tippen Sie kurz auf USBSpeicher aktivieren. Das Gert wird als Wechseldatentrger erkannt und Sie erhalten die Info USBSpeicher in Verwendung. Nach kurzem Tippen auf die Home-Taste knnen Sie Ihr Gert normal
weiternutzen. Sie haben nun von Ihrem Computer Zugriff auf den internen Speicher des Gertes
und knnen Dateien auf das Gert kopieren, lschen oder verschieben.

DE - 5

3.) Wenn eine USB Verbindung mit dem Computer besteht, wird Ihnen in der Statusleiste ein USB Symbol
angezeigt. In der erweiterten Statusleiste (zum ffnen bitte kurz auf die Uhr in der Statusleiste tippen)
bekommen Sie zustzliche Informationen und knnen die USB Verbindung aktivieren bzw. deaktivieren.

Um den Speicher zu deaktivieren, whlen Sie USB-Speicher deaktivieren aus.

Whlen Sie beim Computer die Funktion Sicher Entfernen


trennen.

aus, um das Gert vom Computer zu

Hinweis: Die vorinstallierten Anwendungen und das Android Betriebssystem nehmen einen Teil des vorhandenen internen
Speichers ein ca. 1 GB Speicherplatz wird bentigt. Aus diesem Grunde steht Ihnen nicht der gesamte interne Speicher zur
Verfgung.

8.) Touchscreen
Dieses Gert wird ber einen Touchscreen gesteuert. Sie knnen mit Ihren Fingern durch leichtes Tippen
auf den Touchscreen ganz einfach Anwendungen starten, Texte auf der virtuellen Tastatur eingeben
und durch wischen in die jeweilige Richtung zwischen den einzelnen Startbildschirmen wechseln.
Bitte entfernen Sie die Display Schutzfolie vor der Verwendung des Gertes.
Der Touchscreen erkennt geringe elektrische Ladungen, wie sie beispielsweise vom menschlichen Finger
abgegeben wird und bestimmt so den Eingabepunkt.
Nutzen Sie fr die Eingabe also idealerweise Ihre Fingerspitzen. Die Bedienung mit einem Stift oder
anderen spitzen Gegenstnden ist nicht mglich.
Der Touchscreen sollte nicht mit Wasser oder anderen elektrischen Vorrichtungen in Berhrung
kommen, um Fehlfunktionen und dauerhafte Defekte zu vermeiden.
Hinweise:
a.
Wird der Touchscreen zwei Minuten lang nicht bedient, wechselt das Gert in den Standby Modus. Drcken Sie kurz die Ein / Aus
Taste, um in den aktiven Modus zu wechseln.
b. Um ungewnschte Eingaben zu verhindern, ist automatisch eine Tastensperre aktiviert. Entriegeln Sie bitte die Tastensperre auf
dem Touchscreen. Berhren Sie das geschlossene Schloss

auf dem Display und halten Sie dieses gedrckt. Ziehen Sie

nun das Schloss auf das soeben erschienende geffnete Schloss


Bildschirm ist nun entsperrt.

und lsen Sie dann Ihren Finger vom Display. Der

Sie knnen das Gert in alle Richtungen drehen. Es verfgt ber einen Sensor, der das Display
automatisch ausrichtet.
DE - 6

9.) Der Startbildschirm


Ansicht

Entsperren des Displays


Wird der Touchscreen zwei Minuten lang nicht bedient, wechselt das Gert in den Standby
Modus. Drcken Sie kurz die Ein / Aus Taste, um in den aktiven Modus zu wechseln. Das Display
ist zum Schutz vor ungewnschten Eingaben gesperrt. Berhren Sie das geschlossene Schloss
auf dem Display und halten Sie dieses gedrckt. Ziehen Sie nun das Schloss auf das soeben
erschienende geffnete Schloss
und lsen Sie dann Ihren Finger vom Display. Der Bildschirm ist
nun entsperrt

Ziehen Sie das Schloss Symbol mit Ihrem Finger in Pfeilrichtung

Hinweis: Ziehen Sie das Schloss Symbol zum erscheinenden Kamera Symbol, um direkt die
Kameraanwendung zu ffnen.
Statusleiste
Die Statusleiste finden Sie im unteren Bereich des Startbildschirms. Sie besitzt folgende
Funktionalitt:
Zurck

Zuletzt genutzte
Programme

Startbildschirm

Zeit

WLAN Verbindung

DE - 7

Ladezustand Batterie

Sie erhalten Informationen ber:

die zuletzt genutzten Programme


die Signalstrke der aktuellen WLAN Verbindung
die aktuelle Uhrzeit
den aktuelle Batterieladezustand

Sie knnen folgende Funktionen ausfhren:

Startbildschirm aufrufen
im jeweilig aufgerufenem Men einen Schritt zurckgehen
die zuletzt genutzten Programme aufrufen

Durch kurzes Tippen auf die Uhr ffnen Sie die erweiterte Statusleiste. Hier werden Ihnen aktuelle
Statusmeldungen angezeigt. Durch nochmaliges Tippen auf die Uhr in der erweiterten Statusleiste
werden Ihnen verschiedene Schnellzugriffe, wie zum Beispiel der Zugang zu den Einstellungen,
angezeigt.
Anpassung des Startbildschirms
Sie knnen Ihren Startbildschirm ganz einfach an Ihre individuellen Bedrfnisse anpassen. Wenn Sie ein
Icon lschen mchten, tippen Sie etwas lnger mit Ihrem Finger auf das Icon und schieben Sie es dann
in das eingeblendete X-Symbol. Nehmen Sie den Finger nun vom Touchscreen und das Icon wird
gelscht.
Wenn Sie ein Icon aus der Anwendungsbersicht auf den Startbildschirm positionieren wollen, tippen
Sie in der Anwendungsbersicht etwas lnger auf das Icon und der Startbildschirm erscheint. Schieben
Sie das Icon an die gewnschte Stelle und lsen Sie den Finger vom Touchscreen. Das Icon wurde nun
dem Startbildschirm hinzugefgt. Wenn Sie ein Icon auf ein anderes Icon legen, wird automatisch ein
Ordner mit beiden Icons angelegt. Tippen Sie auf den Ordner, um alle darin abgelegten Icons angezeigt zu
bekommen und whlen Sie dann das gewnschte Icon durch kurzes Tippen aus.
Sie knnen dem Startbildschirm auerdem Widgets hinzufgen. Tippen Sie dazu bitte auf die
-Taste in
der rechten oberen Ecke des Startbildschirms, um das Anwendungsmen zu ffnen. Tippen Sie als
nchstes auf das Wort Widgets. Es werden Ihnen nun alle auf dem Gert verfgbaren Widgets angezeigt.
Das Hinzufgen eines Widgets auf den Startbildschirm funktioniert genau, wie das Hinzufgen eines
Icons.
Wenn Sie das Hintergrundbild ndern mchten, tippen Sie einfach auf eine freie Stelle auf einem
Startbildschirm und halten Sie den Finger solange auf das Display gedrckt, bis das
Hintergrundauswahlmen erscheint.

DE - 8

Verschiedene Startbildschirme nutzen


Ihnen stehen fnf individuell einzurichtende Startbildschirme zur Verfgung. Durch eine leichte
Wischbewegung nach links oder rechts, knnen Sie ganz leicht zwischen Ihnen wechseln.

Durch Drcken der Home-Taste gelangen Sie immer automatisch zum mittleren Startbildschirm zurck.

Vorinstallierte Anwendungen auf dem Startbildschirm


Auf dem Startbildschirm sind verschiedene Anwendungen bereits vorinstalliert:
-

Suchleiste fr die Google Suche


Wettervorschau
Browser
Musik
Galerie
E-Mail
Einstellungen
AndroidPIT (App Center)

A Verknpfung zur Google Suche


B Anwendungsbersicht
C Weltweite Wettervorhersage
D Apps auf dem Startbildschirm
E Statusleiste: Zurck, Home, zuletzt
genutzte Programme, Uhrzeit, Wlan,
Akkustatus

DE - 9

a) Suchleiste fr die Google Suche

Tippen Sie kurz auf die Lupe, um die Google Suchfunktion zu ffnen. Geben Sie den gewnschten
Suchbegriff ber die virtuelle Tastatur ein und drcken Sie auf Los. Es werden Ihnen nun die verfgbaren
Suchergebnisse der Google Suche angezeigt.
Tippen Sie auf das Mikrofon, um die Spracheingabe zu aktivieren. Sie knnen nun den gewnschten
Suchbegriff einfach durch deutliches Sprechen eingeben. Die Spracherkennung schlgt Ihnen
anschlieend verschiedene mgliche Suchbegriffe vor. Bettigen Sie den gewnschten Begriff durch
kurzes Tippen und Ihnen werden die Suchergebnisse der Google Suche angezeigt.

Tipp: Durch eine schnelle Auf- oder Abwrtsbewegung, nach der Sie den
Finger vom Touchscreen lsen, scrollt das Gert schnell durch eine Liste.
Dies funktioniert in allen Anzeigen, die grer als das Display sind.

Hinweis: Fr diese Funktion ist eine WLAN Verbindung zum Internet erforderlich.

b) Anwendungsbersicht

Tippen Sie auf dieses Symbol, um die Anwendungsbersicht zu ffnen. Hier werden Ihnen alle auf dem
Gert installierten Anwendungen angezeigt. Durch Tippen auf das dazugehrige Symbol knnen Sie die
gewnschte Anwendung direkt starten.

DE - 10

c) Wettervorschau
Das Wettervorschau Widget zeigt Ihnen auf einem Blick die aktuell eingestellte Uhrzeit, Datum,
Wetterlage sowie Temperatur am eingestellten Ort.
Um die Einstellungen zu ndern, wechseln Sie bitte in die Anwendungsbersicht und tippen Sie auf das
Wettervorschau Icon. Hier knnen Sie nun die gewnschten nderungen vornehmen.

Einstellungsmen der Wettervorschau


Hinweis: Fr diese Funktion ist eine WLAN Verbindung zum Internet erforderlich.

d) WIFI
Um das Gert mit dem Internet zu verbinden, bentigen Sie eine WLAN Verbindung. Um diese
herzustellen, tippen Sie bitte auf das WIFI Icon auf dem Startbildschirm, oder ffnen Sie in den
Einstellungen die WLAN Einstellungen.
Hinweis: Bitte beachten Sie, dass sich ein WLAN Netz in Reichweite ihrer aktuellen Position befinden
muss.
Automatische Verbindung
ffnen Sie ber das WIFI Icon oder ber die Einstellungen die WLAN
Einstellungen. Hier knnen Sie die WLAN Funktion ganz einfach
aktivieren oder deaktivieren. Schieben Sie den virtuellen Schalter
einfach aus der Position An nach links, um die WLAN Funktion zu
deaktivieren. Die Anzeige wechselt nun zu Aus.
Um die deaktivierte WLAN Funktion wieder zu aktivieren, schieben
Sie den virtuellen Schalter einfach nach rechts.

In den WLAN-Einstellungen werden Ihnen auf der rechten Seite alle verfgbaren Netzwerke sowie
alle bereits genutzten Netzwerke angezeigt.
Tippen Sie bitte auf das gewnschte Netzwerk und geben Sie gegebenenfalls den passenden
WLAN Schlssel (Passwort) ein, um eine Verbindung herzustellen.
DE - 11

Besttigen Sie das gegebenenfalls eingegebene Passwort durch tippen auf die Enter Taste und
tippen Sie nun auf Verbinden. Nach einem kurzen Moment ist die Verbindung hergestellt.
Hinweise:
a) Wenn das Gert in den Standby Modus wechselt, wird WLAN automatisch deaktiviert. Dies
verringert den Stromverbrauch und fhrt so automatisch zu einer lngeren Akkulaufzeit. Wenn
das Gert wieder in den aktiven Modus wechselt, wird automatisch die WLAN Verbindung
wiederhergestellt. Dies kann einige Sekunden dauern.
b) Die Liste der aktuell auffindbaren WLAN Netzwerke wird automatisch aktualisiert.
c) Wenn die WLAN Funktion aktiviert ist, verbindet sich das Gert automatisch mit einem bereits
konfigurierten Netzwerk, sofern es sich in Reichweite befindet.
d) Wenn sich ein unbekanntes WLAN Netzwerk in Reichweite befindet, wird ein Informationsfeld
eingeblendet.
Manuelle Verbindung
Um manuell nach einem erreichbaren WLAN Netz zu suchen, gehen Sie bitte wie folgt vor:
(1) ffnen Sie die Einstellungen.
(2) ffnen Sie jetzt die WLAN-Einstellungen und tippen Sie auf Scannen.
(3) Sollte das WLAN Netz nicht in der Liste der verfgbaren Netzwerke erscheinen, whlen Sie den Punkt
Netzwerk hinzufgen aus, um von Hand die Netzwerk SSID, das Sicherheitsprotokoll und das
gegebenenfalls zugehrige Passwort einzugeben. Zur Besttigung Ihrer Eingaben tippen Sie bitte auf
Speichern.

e) Galerie
Tippen Sie kurz auf das Galerie Icon, um eine bersicht aller vorhandenen Alben und Bilder zu
bekommen.
Whlen Sie die gewnschte Galerie und anschlieend das gewnschte Bild durch erneutes, kurzes
Tippen aus. Das Bild wird Ihnen nun als Vollbild dargestellt.

Tippen Sie auf das Fotosymbol


Gruppierungsmglichkeiten whlen.

, um zwischen verschiedenen
DE - 12

Um das nchste oder vorherige Bild angezeigt zu bekommen, schieben


Sie das aktuelle Bild mit dem Finger einfach nach links oder rechts aus
dem Display.

Legen Sie zwei Finger auf den Touchscreen und ziehen Sie diese
auseinander, um das Bild stufenlos zu vergrern. Wenn Sie die Finger
wieder zusammenfhren, wird das Bild stufenlos verkleinert. Tippen Sie
kurz und schnell doppelt auf den Touchscreen, wird das Bild automatisch
vergrert und durch erneutes doppeltippen wieder in der
Ursprungsgre angezeigt.

Durch kurzes Tippen auf den Touchscreen stehen Ihnen weitere Funktionen zur Verfgung.
Tippen Sie auf Men-Symbol
, um weitere Optionen zu
erhalten
Hier knnen Sie eine Diashow starten, das Bild bearbeiten,
drehen, zuschneiden, festlegen als Hintergrundbild und sich die
Details des Bildes anzeigen lassen.
Tippen Sie auf das Mlltonnen-Symbol
Bild zu lschen.
Tippen Sie auf das Teilen-Symbol
Email zu versenden.

, um das ausgewhlte
, um das Bild bspw. per

f) Musik
Tippen Sie kurz auf das Musik Icon im Startbildschirm oder der Anwendungsbersicht, um die
Musikwiedergabe zu ffnen.
In der folgenden bersicht haben Sie die Wahl, sich Ihre Musik nach Interpreten, Alben, Titel, Playlist
oder der aktuellen Wiedergabe sortiert anzeigen zu lassen. Tippen Sie dazu einfach kurz auf das
entsprechende Symbol.
Interpreten

Zeigt alle Musikdateien nach den einzelnen Interpreten sortiert an.

Alben

Zeigt alle Musikdateien nach den einzelnen Alben sortiert an.

Titel

Zeigt alle Musikdateien nach Titel sortiert an.

Playlists

Zeigt die erstellten Playlists an.

Aktuelle Wiedergabe

Springt direkt zur aktuellen Wiedergabe.

Whlen Sie durch kurzes Tippen auf den Namen die gewnschte Datei und die Musikwiedergabe startet.

DE - 13

Wiedergabebildschirm
(1) Aktuelle Wiedergabe
(2) Zufallswiedergabe aktivieren / deaktivieren
(3) Wiederholungsoptionen:
a)
Alle Titel werden wiederholt
b)
Aktueller Titel wird wiederholt
c)
Wiederholung ist deaktiviert
(4) Titeldetails
(5) Nchster / Vorheriger Titel
(6) Play / Pause
(7) Zeitleiste

Tippen Sie auf das Pause Symbol , um die Wiedergabe anzuhalten.


Um die Wiedergabe fortzusetzen, tippen Sie auf das Play Symbol .
Tippen Sie auf das Vor- bzw. Zurck Symbol / , um den vorherigen oder nchsten Titel
abzuspielen.
Tippen Sie auf eine Stelle der Zeitleiste, um die Wiedergabe direkt an dieser Stelle fortzusetzen.
Drcken Sie die Lautstrke +/- Tasten an der Seite des Gertes, um die Lautstrke anzupassen.
Um die Vorschau der aktuellen Wiedergabeliste zu ffnen, tippen Sie bitte auf das
Wiedergabeliste Symbol . Tippen Sie auf einen Titel, um diesen direkt abzuspielen.
Um den Wiederholungsmodus zu ndern, tippen Sie auf das Wiederholungsmodus Symbol .
Um auf den Startbildschirm zu gelangen, tippen Sie kurz auf die Home-Taste
. Die
Musikwiedergabe wird dadurch nicht gestoppt. So knnen Sie beispielsweise mit dem Browser im
Internet surfen und gleichzeitig Ihre Musik hren. Tippen Sie einfach erneut auf das Musik Icon
um Zurck zur Musikwiedergabe zu gelangen.

Im Wiedergabemodus knnen Sie weitere Einstellungen vornehmen. Tippen Sie dazu kurz auf die
Men-Taste

Bibliothek Eine bersicht aller vorhandenen Musikdateien wird angezeigt.


Party Mix Den Party Mix Modus aktivieren bzw. deaktivieren.
Zur Playlist hinzufgen Den aktuell gespielten Titel zu einer Playlist hinzufgen.
Lschen Lschen des aktuell gespielten Titels.
Toneffekte Einen Soundeffekt fr die Musikwiedergabe festlegen.

DE - 14

g) Video
Tippen Sie kurz auf das Galerie Icon im Startbildschirm oder der Anwendungsbersicht, um die
Videowiedergabe zu ffnen.
Es werden Ihnen nun die verfgbaren Videodateien in einer Liste angezeigt. Whlen Sie die gewnschte
Datei durch kurzes Antippen und das Video startet.

h) App Center
Auf dem Gert ist das AndroidPIT App Center bereits vorinstalliert. Hier finden Sie verschiedene Apps,
Testberichte, einen Blog und ein Forum.
Fr weitere Hinweise oder Hilfe zur Nutzung des App Centers besuchen Sie bitte die Homepage des
Anbieters unter www.androidpit.de.
Hinweis: Fr diese Funktion ist eine WLAN Verbindung zum Internet erforderlich.

i) Web Browser
Um den Web Browser zu starten, tippen Sie bitte auf das Browser Icon
in der Anwendungsbersicht.
Um eine Internetseite zu ffnen, tippen Sie bitte auf das Eingabefeld fr die Internetadresse. Die virtuelle
Tastatur ffnet sich nun und Sie knnen jetzt die Adresse der gewnschten Internetseite eingeben. Tippen
Sie auf die Enter Taste, um Ihre Eingabe zu besttigen und die Internetseite zu ffnen.
Hinweis: Nicht alle Netzwerke bieten einen Internetzugriff. Einige Netzwerke bieten nur einen Zugriff auf andere verbundene lokale
Rechner und keine Internetverbindung.

Nutzung der virtuellen Tastatur


Tippen Sie auf das Eingabefeld zum ffnen der virtuellen Tastatur. Sie knnen nun Texte eingeben oder
Internetseiten aufrufen.
a. Caps Lock (Gro- und Kleinschreibung)
b. Rcksprungtaste
c. Aufruf des Mens fr die Nummern, Zeichen und
Sonderzeichen Eingabe
d. Space Taste (Leerzeicheneingabe)
e. Enter Taste ( Besttigung Ihrer Eingabe)

DE - 15

Eingabe von Sonderzeichen


Um ein Sonderzeichen wie etwa einzugeben, tippen Sie lange mit Ihrem Finger auf die Taste a um
das Sonderzeichenmen aufzurufen. Gleiten Sie nun mit dem Finger auf das gewnschte Sonderzeichen,
beispielsweise das und lsen Sie den Finger wieder vom Display. Sie haben nun ein eingeben.

Nutzung des Web Browsers

Sie knnen durch die Anzeige im Display scrollen, indem Sie eine vertikale Wischbewegung mit Ihrem
Finger durchfhren. Bitte beginnen Sie die Wischbewegung nicht auf einem Menpunkt oder Link, da
ansonsten die vorhandene Verknpfung geffnet werden wrde.
Um einen Internetlink zu ffnen, tippen Sie ganz einfach auf den Link. Die neue Seite ffnet sich
automatisch.
Um das Web Browser Men zu ffnen, drcken Sie bitte die Men-Taste
. Hier stehen Ihnen
verschiedene Funktionen zur Verfgung. Unter anderem knnen Sie hier die geffnete Webseite
aktualisieren, einen neuen Tab ffnen, Webseiten offline lesbar machen oder zu den Web Browser
Einstellungen wechseln.
Um zu der vorherigen Seite zurckzugehen, drcken Sie bitte die Zurck-Taste
.
Um direkt zum Startbildschirm zurckzukehren, drcken Sie bitte auf die Home-Taste
.
Um einen Text einzugeben, tippen Sie auf das entsprechende Feld und nutzen Sie die virtuelle
Tastatur zur Eingabe des Textes.

Hinweis: Fr diese Funktion ist eine WLAN Verbindung zum Internet erforderlich.

DE - 16

j) Anwendungsbersicht
Tippen Sie kurz auf das Anwendungsbersicht Icon
, um die Anwendungsbersicht zu ffnen. Sie
sehen nun eine bersicht aller vorinstallierten und bereits von Ihnen installierten Anwendungen. ffnen
Sie die gewnschte Anwendung durch kurzes Tippen auf das entsprechende Icon.

Anwendungsbersicht

k) System Einstellungen
Tippen Sie im Anwendungsmen auf das Einstellungen Icon, um die System Einstellungen aufzurufen.

Auf der linken Seite des Mens finden Sie die einzelnen Kategorien. Durch kurzes Drcken auf den
jeweils ausgewhlten Meneintrag, werden die verfgbaren Einstellmglichkeiten angezeigt.
Beachten Sie bitte, dass eventuell nicht alle von Android angebotenen Funktionen mit diesem Gert
kompatibel sind.
Wenn Sie alle Einstellungen vorgenommen haben, knnen sie mit der Zurck Taste
in das
zuletzt aufgerufene Men zurckkehren, oder mit der Home Taste
direkt auf den
Startbildschirm wechseln.Ihre gettigten Eingaben werden automatisch gespeichert.

DE - 17

Einstellungsbersicht
Drahtlos &

WLAN

Nehmen Sie hier Ihre WLAN-Einstellungen vor.

Netzwerke

Mehr

Hier knnen Sie weitere Netzwerkeinstellungen vornehmen.


Stellen Sie hier die gewnschte Lautstrke und den gewnschten
Benachrichtigungston ein.
Weiterhin knnen Sie einen Besttigungston bei Berhrung des
Touchscreens und einen Hinweiston beim Entsperren der Displaysperre
aktivieren bzw. deaktivieren.

Tne

Display

Helligkeit Displayhelligkeit anpassen.


Hintergrund Auswahl des gewnschten Hintergrundes.
Display autom. drehen Ein- und Ausschalten der automatischen
Ausrichtung des Displays beim Drehen des Gertes.
Ruhezustand Verzgerung vor der automatischen Displayabschaltung

Gert

anpassen.
Schriftgre Einstellen der gewnschten Schriftgre.
Speicher

Hier bekommen Sie Informationen ber den internen Speicher und - falls
eingesetzt - ber Ihre MicroSD-Karte. Weiterhin knnen Sie den Inhalt des
Speichers lschen.

Akku

Hier bekommen Sie Informationen ber den Ladezustand des eingebauten


Akkus.

Apps

Hier knnen Sie Ihre installierten Anwendungen verwalten und Informationen


ber die Anwendungen erhalten.

Konten &
Synchronisierung

Hier knnen Sie festlegen, ob und wie oft die von Ihnen angelegten Konten
synchronisiert werden sollen.

Standortdienste

Hier knnen Sie diversen Android Anwendungen erlauben, Ihren aktuellen


Standort ber Drahtlosnetzwerke festzustellen und zu nutzen (z.B. Google
Maps). Sie knnen weiterhin festlegen, ob Google Suchergebnisse und
andere Dienste an Ihren Standort anpassen darf.

Sicherheit

Hier knnen Sie beispielsweise eine Bildschirmsperre einrichten und weitere

Nutzer

System

sicherheitsrelevante Einstellungen vornehmen.


Sprache & Eingabe

Hier knnen Sie beispielsweise Ihre bevorzugte Sprache einstellen, dem


persnlichen Wrterbuch verschiedene Wrter hinzufgen und diverse
Einstellungen an der Tastatur vornehmen.

Sichern &
Zurcksetzen

Hier knnen Sie Ihre Systemeinstellungen und Anwendungsdaten auf


Google-Servern sichern. Des Weiteren knnen Sie die Werkseinstellungen
wiederherstellen. ACHTUNG: Dazu werden alle auf dem Gert
gespeicherten Daten gelscht.

Datum & Uhrzeit

Hier knnen Sie das Datum, die Uhrzeit, die Zeitzone und das Anzeigeformat
festlegen.

ber das Tablet

Zeigt Ihnen Informationen ber das Gert.

DE - 18

10.) Versand / Empfang von E-Mails


Auf diesem Gert ist eine E-Mail Anwendung vorinstalliert. Sie knnen damit Ihre bereits bestehende EMail Adresse nutzen, um E-Mails zu versenden und zu empfangen.
Hinweis: Fr diese Funktion ist eine WLAN Verbindung zum Internet erforderlich .

ffnen Sie die Anwendung ber das E-Mail Icon, welches Sie im Anwendungsmen finden.

Einrichtung Ihres E-Mail Postfaches


(1) Starten Sie die E-Mail Anwendung durch Tippen auf das E-Mail Symbol. Sie werden nun aufgefordert
Ihr E-Mail Postfach einzurichten.
(2) Geben Sie Ihre E-Mail Adresse sowie Ihr zugehriges Passwort ein und tippen Sie dann auf Weiter.
Anschlieend benennen Sie Ihr Konto und legen Ihren angezeigten Namen fr ausgehende
Nachrichten fest. Tippen Sie auf Fertig um die Einrichtung abzuschlieen. Ihr E-Mail Postfach wird
als Standard Postfach ausgewhlt, wenn Sie die Option E-Mails standardmig von diesem Konto
senden auswhlen.
(3) Sie knnen Ihr E-Mail Postfach auch manuell einrichten. Geben Sie Ihre E-Mail Adresse und Ihr
zugehriges Passwort ein und tippen Sie anschlieend auf Manuelles Setup, um die E-Mail Server
Informationen einzugeben.

(4) Whlen Sie zwischen den Servertypen POP3, IMAP oder Exchange fr eingehende E-Mails aus.
Hinweis: Wenn Sie nicht wissen, welche Einstellungen Sie vornehmen mssen, kontaktieren Sie bitte Ihren E-Mail Provider, Ihren
Netzwerkadministrator oder suchen Sie mit Begriffen wie etwa POP Adresse und Namen Ihres Provider nach den bentigten
Informationen im Internet.

(5) Geben Sie die bentigten Informationen ein (Server, Port etc.).
(6) Whlen Sie den Servertyp fr ausgehende E-Mails aus und geben Sie die bentigten Informationen
ein.
(7) Tippen Sie Weiter, um im Men fortzufahren. Die E-Mail Anwendung berprft nun die gettigten
Server Einstellungen. Nach erfolgreichem Anlegen sehen Sie die Meldung Your account is set up,
and email is on its way. Ihr Konto ist jetzt eingerichtet.
(8) Vergeben Sie einen Namen fr Ihr Postfach und tippen Sie auf Fertig, um den Vorgang
abzuschlieen.
Hinweis: Sollten Sie mehr als einen Email Account besitzen, wird bei jedem Start der E-Mail Anwendung das Standard Konto
aufgerufen.

DE - 19

Verwaltung der E-Mail Accounts


Hinzufgen eines neuen Postfaches:
(1) ffnen Sie die E-Mail Anwendung und tippen Sie auf die Men Taste
zum Anzeigen der weiteren
Optionen. Whlen Sie den Menpunkt Einstellungen und anschlieend Konto hinzufgen, um ein
neues Postfach anzulegen.
(2) Folgen Sie dem Einrichtungsassistenten, um ein neues Postfach anzulegen.

Lschen eines Postfaches:


(1) ffnen Sie die E-Mail Anwendung und tippen Sie auf die Men Taste
zum Anzeigen der weiteren
Optionen. Whlen Sie den Menpunkt Einstellungen und anschlieend Konto entfernen, um das
gewnschte Postfach zu lschen.

berprfen der Kontoeigenschaften:


(1) ffnen Sie die E-Mail Anwendung und tippen Sie auf die Men Taste
zum Anzeigen der weiteren
Optionen und whlen Sie Einstellungen aus. Auf der linken Seite des Mens werden jetzt alle
bereits angelegten Postfcher angezeigt.
(2) Tippen auf das gewnschte Postfach, um die Kontoeinstellungen anzuzeigen.
(3) Tippen Sie auf die zu ndernde Kontoeinstellung, um die gewnschten Eintrge vorzunehmen.

Anzeige von E-Mail Nachrichten


ffnen Sie die E-Mail Anwendung durch kurzes Tippen auf das E-Mail Icon. Ihr bereits angelegtes
Postfach wird nun angezeigt.
Durch eine vertikale Wischbewegung knnen Sie durch Ihre E-Mails scrollen.
Tippen Sie kurz auf eine bestimmte E-Mail, um diese zu ffnen.
Tippen und halten Sie den Finger auf einer bestimmten E-Mail Nachricht, um weitere Optionen
angezeigt zu bekommen. Es erscheint nun ein Infofeld. Hier knnen Sie jetzt die E-Mail ffnen,
beantworten, weiterleiten oder lschen.

Schreiben von E-Mail Nachrichten


(1) Tippen Sie in der E-Mail bersicht auf das Email Symbol in der oberen Menleiste und es ffnet sich
ein neues Fenster, indem Sie eine neue Email verfassen knnen.
(2) Geben Sie nun die E-Mail Adresse des Empfngers, einen Betreff und den Text in die dafr
vorgesehen Felder ein. Sie knnen ebenfalls Cc/Bcc hinzufgen, um eine E-Mail an mehrere User zu
schreiben.
(3) Tippen Sie auf Senden, um die E-Mail abzuschicken. Tippen Sie auf Speichern, um die
eingegebene E-Mail als Entwurf zu speichern. Wenn Sie auf das Mlleimer Symbol tippen, wird die
aktuell eingegebene E-Mail wieder entfernt.

DE - 20

11.) Verwaltung von Anwendungen


Vorinstallierte Anwendungen
Dieses Gert wird mit bereits vorinstallierten Anwendungen ausgeliefert. Eine bersicht der bereits
installierten Anwendungen finden Sie in der Anwendungsbersicht
. Hierzu gehren unter anderem
der Video Player, Audio Player, Internet Browser, Alarm, Rechner und noch einige mehr. Um eine dieser
Anwendungen zu ffnen, tippen Sie kurz auf das zugehrige Icon.

Installation von Anwendungen


Um Anwendungen auf dem Gert zu installieren, fhren Sie bitte die folgenden Schritte aus:
(1) Laden Sie die Software herunter (beispielsweise aus dem Androidpit Market). Stellen Sie sicher, dass
es sich um eine APK Datei handelt.
(2) Sollten Sie die Dateien auf Ihren Computer heruntergeladen haben, verbinden Sie das Gert per USB
Kabel mit Ihrem Computer und kopieren Sie die Dateien auf den internen Speicher.
(3) Trennen Sie das Gert vom Computer und ffnen Sie den Explorer, um die kopierten Dateien zu
ffnen.
(4) Folgen Sie den auf dem Display erscheinenden Installationsanweisungen, um die Anwendung zu
installieren.
(5) Nach erfolgreicher Installation finden Sie die neue Anwendung im Anwendungsmen.

Deinstallation von Anwendungen

(1) ffnen Sie bitte die System Einstellungen durch kurzes Tippen auf das Einstellungen Icon in der
Anwendungsbersicht.
(2) Tippen Sie jetzt kurz auf den Menpunkt Apps, um in die Anwendungseinstellungen zu gelangen.
(3) Whlen Sie zwischen den Menoberpunkten Heruntergeladen, USB-Speicher, Aktiv und Alle die
gewnschte Anwendungsbersicht durch kurzes Tippen aus.
(4) Whlen Sie als nchstes durch kurzes Tippen die Anwendung aus, die Sie deinstallieren mchten.
(5) Tippen Sie nun auf Deinstallieren und besttigen Sie Ihre Eingabe mit OK, um die Anwendung vom
Gert zu deinstallieren.

Hinweis: Sie knnen vorinstallierte Software nicht lschen.

DE - 21

12.) Datei Manager


ffnen Sie die Anwendungsbersicht und tippen Sie anschlieend kurz auf das Datei-Manager Icon, um
den Datei-Manager zu starten.

Durch Dateien und Ordner navigieren


Ihnen stehen der interne Speicher (internal Memory), die Speicherkarte (SD Card) und USB zur
Auswahl. Weiterhin knnen Sie sich Bild- und Videodateien anzeigen lassen. Tippen Sie auf den
gewnschten Speicherort, um die darauf enthaltenen Dateien als Liste angezeigt zu
bekommen.
Mit einer vertikalen Wischbewegung knnen Sie nun durch Ihre Dateien und Ordner scrollen.
ffnen Sie eine Datei oder einen Ordner durch kurzes Tippen.

Sie knnen einen Schritt zurckwechseln

indem Sie das entsprechenden Icon kurz

antippen.

Die Toolbar nutzen

Direkt in das Hauptverzeichnis wechseln.

Interner Speicher

Micro SD Karte (falls im Tablet eingesetzt)

USB Speicher (falls mit dem Tablet verbunden)

Zeigt Ihnen alle verfgbaren Bilder an

Zeigt Ihnen alle verfgbaren Videos an

Hier knnen Sie sich alle laufenden Prozesse anzeigen lassen.


Editor: Hier knnen Sie
Kopie erstellen oder
gewnschte Datei und
Dateinamen. Whlen
Funktion aus.

Dateien einfgen (paste), lschen, eine


verschieben. Tippen Sie auf die
es erscheint ein grner Pfeil vor dem
Sie anschlieend die gewnschte

DE - 22

Dateien und Ordner kopieren, verschieben und umbenennen


1.)
2.)
3.)
4.)

Navigieren Sie zu der gewnschten Datei in der Dateibersicht.


Tippen und halten Sie den Finger auf der Datei, bis ein Infofeld erscheint.
Whlen Sie nun die gewnschte Funktion aus. Sie haben die Wahl zwischen Datei lschen
(Delete file), Datei umbenennen, Datei kopieren und Datei verschieben (Move File),
Zum kopieren oder verschieben tippen Sie kurz auf das entsprechende Icon (Copy / Move)
und navigieren Sie anschlieend in das Zielverzeichnis. Tippen Sie anschlieend auf das
Editor Icon

5.)
6.)

und whlen Sie durch kurzes Tippen Paste, um die Datei einzufgen.

Um eine Datei zu lschen tippen Sie auf Delete und besttigen Sie zur Sicherheit nochmals
mit lschen. Zum Abbrechen tippen Sie kurz auf stornieren.
Zum Umbenennen einer Datei tippen Sie auf Datei umbenennen und geben Sie
anschlieend ber die virtuelle Tastatur den neuen Dateinamen ein. Besttigen Sie Ihre
Eingabe mit umbenennen oder brechen Sie den Vorgang mit stornieren ab.

13.) Lesen von Office Dokumenten


Auf diesem Gert ist bereits die Anwendung Office Suite zum Lesen von Office Dokumenten
vorinstalliert. Sie knnen Word, Excel, oder Powerpoint Dateien lesen.
1.)
2.)
3.)
4.)

Kopieren Sie die gewnschten Office Dateien auf das Gert.


ffnen Sie die Anwendung Office Suite.
Navigieren Sie mit dem Explorer zu der gewnschten Datei.
Whlen Sie die gewnschte Datei durch kurzes Tippen aus und wischen Sie mit dem Finger
vertikal oder horizontal ber das Display, um zwischen den einzelnen Seiten zu blttern.
Tippen Sie kurz auf die Mentaste, um weitere Optionen zu ffnen. Sie knnen zum Beispiel
nach einem bestimmten Text suchen oder Wrter zhlen.

DE - 23

14.) Task Manager


Dieses Gert ist Multitasking fhig. Sie knnen also zur gleichen Zeit mehrere Anwendungen
gleichzeitig ffnen. Sie knnen beispielsweise Musik hren und zur gleichen Zeit im Internet surfen oder
Bilder betrachten.
Unter Umstnden kann es vorkommen, dass zu viele Anwendungen gleichzeitig im Hintergrund laufen. In
diesem Fall ffnen Sie bitte die Anwendung Task Killer und beenden diejenigen Anwendungen, die Sie
im Augenblick nicht bentigen.

(1)

ffnen Sie die Task Killer


Anwendung.

(3)

Zur Besttigung Ihrer Auswahl tippen Sie


apps Symbol.

(2)

Whlen Sie die Anwendungen, die


Sie aktuell nicht bentigen.

bitte kurz auf das Kill selected

15.) Eingeschrnkte Garantiebedingungen


Die Garantie deckt nur den Ersatz dieses Intenso Produkts ab. Die Garantie gilt nicht fr normale
Verschleierscheinungen, die sich aus fehlerhaftem, unsachgemem Gebrauch, Nachlssigkeit, Unfall,
Inkompatibilitt, oder aus mangelhafter Leistung einer bestimmten Computer Hardware oder Computer
Software ergeben.
Es besteht kein Garantieanspruch bei Nichteinhaltung der Intenso Bedienungsanleitung sowie bei
unsachgemer Montage, Gebrauch oder bei Defekten durch andere Gerte.
Wird das Produkt Erschtterungen, elektrostatischer Entladungen, Wrme- oder Feuchtigkeitseinwirkungen
jenseits der Produktspezifikationen ausgesetzt, besteht kein Garantieanspruch.
Intenso haftet nicht fr Datenverluste oder jegliche, auftretende Begleitschden oder Folgeschden, fr die
Verletzung der Garantiebedingungen oder fr sonstige Schden, gleich welche Ursache zugrunde liegt.
Dieses Produkt ist nicht fr eine kommerzielle Nutzung oder fr medizinische und spezielle Anwendungen
vorgesehen, in denen der Ausfall des Produktes Verletzungen, Todesflle oder erhebliche Sachschden
verursachen kann.
DE - 24

16.) Technische Daten


CPU
Arbeitsspeicher
Betriebssystem
Kompatible Betriebssysteme
Anschlussmglichkeiten
WLAN
G-Sensor
Photo Format
Audio Format
Video Format
Display
Kamera
SNR
Frequenzbereich
Netzteil
Interne Batterie

1 GHz Cortex A8
512 MB DDR 3
Android 4.0.4
Windows XP / Vista / 7 / Linux 2,4 und hher / Mac 10.6 und
hher
Kopfhrer, Micro SD (SDHC), Micro USB
WiFi (802.11 b/g/n)
360 Grad Rotation
JPEG, BMP, GIF, PNG
MP3, WMA, WAV, OGG, FLAC, APE
MPEG1, MPEG 4, FLV
TFT LCD Display, 800 x 480 Pixel
0,3 MP Front Kamera
>= 80 dB
20 Hz 20 KHz
(V) AC Adapter (Ktec KSAS0100500200HE): AC Input 100240V50/60Hz, DC Output 5V / 2A
Wiederaufladbarer Lithium-Ionen Polymer Akku

17.) Wartung des Gertes


Sprhen oder Tragen Sie niemals eine Flssigkeit direkt auf das Display oder
Gehuse auf.

18.) Suberung des Gertes


Wischen Sie Gehuse, Rahmen und Display vorsichtig mit einem weichen,
fussel- und chemikalienfreien Tuch ab. Verwenden Sie nur Reinigu ngsmittel,
die speziell fr Displays bestimmt sind.

19.) Entsorgung von Elektro-Altgerten


Die mit diesem Symbol gekennzeichneten Gerte unterliegen der
europischen Richtlinie 2002/96/EC.
Alle Elektro- und Elektroaltgrte mssen getrennt vom Hausmll ber
die dafr vorgesehenen staatlichen Stellen entsorgt werden.
Mit der ordnungsgemen Entsorgung von Elektro-Altgerten
vermeiden Sie Umweltschden.

DE - 25

20.) Lizenzinformation
HINWEIS!
Sehr geehrte Kundin, sehr geehrter Kunde,
bei Interesse knnen Sie und jeder Dritte den Quelltext der verwendeten GPL/LGPL von der Intenso
Homepage http://www.intenso.de herunterladen. Der Quelltext des gesuchten Produkts ist fr jeden
zugnglich ber Auswahl der gltigen Produktkategorie und des gewnschten Gertes. In den
Produktdetails finden Sie den Menpunkt Treiber. ffnen Sie dieses Men, um den zugehrigen
GPL/LGPL Quelltext herunterzuladen. Gegen eine Kostenpauschale von 15 ist es ebenfalls mglich diesen
Quelltext per Postzustellung zu erhalten.
Gerne knnen Sie uns auch telefonisch zu dem Thema erreichen unter der kostenpflichtigen Rufnummer
0900-1504030 (0,39/Minute aus dem deutschen Festnetz. Mobilfunkpreise knnen abweichen.) oder per
Mail an support@intenso.de
Weitere Informationen ber die GPL/LGPL-Lizenzen nden Sie unter www.gnu.org
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast,
the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software-to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free
Software Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other
Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Lesser General Public License instead.) You can
apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are
designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this
service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the
software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you
to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of
the software, or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the
recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code.
And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives
you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.
Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is
no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its
recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not
reflect on the original authors' reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that
redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program
proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use
or not licensed at all.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder
saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below, refers to
any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" means either the Program or any derivative
work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or
with modifications and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without
limitation in the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you".
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside
DE - 26

its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if
its contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made by running the
Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any
medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright
notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of
any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty
protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the
Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided
that you also meet all of these conditions:
a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the
date of any change.
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from
the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of
this License.
c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when started
running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an
appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a
warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the user how to
view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an
announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not
derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as
separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the
Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other
licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you;
rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on
the Program.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work
based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under
the scope of this License.
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or
executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed
under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge no
more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the
corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium
customarily used for software interchange; or,
c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code.
(This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object
code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an
executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the
executable. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is
normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on)
of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the
executable.
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then
offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source
code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this
License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will
automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights,
DE - 27

from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full
compliance.
5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants
you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by
law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based
on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for
copying, distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it.
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatically
receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms
and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted
herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License.
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not
limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise)
that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If
you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other
pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a
patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies
directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance
of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to
contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free
software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made
generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent
application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software
through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this
License.
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by
copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an
explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in
or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in
the body of this License.
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public License
from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this
License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions
either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does
not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free
Software Foundation.
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are
different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software
Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will
be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of
promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE
PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE
STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE
PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE,
YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY
COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE
PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL,
DE - 28

SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO


USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED
INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE
PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER
PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way
to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source
file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the "copyright"
line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
one line to give the program's name and an idea of what it does.
Copyright (C) yyyy name of author
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
GNU General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode:
Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author
Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details
type `show w'. This is free software, and you are welcome
to redistribute it under certain conditions; type `show c'
for details.
The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate parts of the General Public
License. Of course, the commands you use may be called something other than `show w' and `show c'; they
could even be mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a "copyright
disclaimer" for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright
interest in the program `Gnomovision'
(which makes passes at compilers) written
by James Hacker.
signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1989
Ty Coon, President of Vice

DE - 29

Intenso GmbH
Datum: 12.07.2013

EG Konformittserklrung
Wir, die Intenso GmbH,
mit Sitz in der Diepholzerstr. 15 in 49377 Vechta, Deutschland
erklren auf eigene Verantwortung, dass das Produkt:
Modell: 7 Intenso TAB714 (Artikel Nr. 5509852)
Beschreibung: Tablet-Computer
auf das sich diese Erklrung bezieht, mit den folgenden Richtlinien und Normen konform ist:
R&TTE Richtlinie 1999/5/EG
EN 301 489-1 V1.9.2
EN 301 489-17 V2.1.1
EN 300 328 V1.7.1 : 2006-10
EN 55022:2010 (Class B)
EN 55024:2010
EN 61000-3-2:2006+A1 :2009+A2 :2009 (Class D)
EN 61000-3-3:2008
Niederspannungsrichtlinie 2006/95/EG
EN 60950-1:2006+A11:2009+A1:2010+A12:2011+A12:Berichtigung 2012
ko-Design Richtlinie 2009/125/EG
1275/2008
278/2009
ROHS Richtlinie 2011/65/EU
Die auf das oben angefhrte Gert bezogenen technischen Unterlagen sind an folgender Stelle
hinterlegt:
Intenso GmbH
Diepholzerstr. 15, 49377 Vechta, Deutschland
Autorisierte Person:

____________________________
Geschftsfhrer: Thomas Phlking
DE - 30

Instruction manual TAB 714


Thank you for choosing the TAB714. Please follow these instructions in order to be informed about
the key functions of the device.

1.) Contents
1.) Contents ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 1
2.) Notes ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2
3.) Device overview..................................................................................................................................................................................... 4
4.) Package contents .................................................................................................................................................................................. 4
5.) Charging the battery .............................................................................................................................................................................. 5
6.) Using a Micro SD/SDHC Card ............................................................................................................................................................... 5
7.) Transfer of Data between Device and Computer ................................................................................................................................... 5
8.) Touchscreen .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 6
9.) The Home Screen.................................................................................................................................................................................. 7
View ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 7
Unlocking the screen .................................................................................................................................................................................. 7
Status bar ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7
Adjusting the main screen........................................................................................................................................................................... 8
Using several home screens ....................................................................................................................................................................... 9
Pre-installed applications on the home screen ........................................................................................................................................... 9
a) Search bar for Google search ........................................................................................................................................................... 10
b) Applications overview ........................................................................................................................................................................... 10
c) Weather forecast................................................................................................................................................................................... 11
d) WiFi ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 11
Automatic connection................................................................................................................................................................................ 11
Manual connection .................................................................................................................................................................................... 12
e) Gallery .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 12
f) Music ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 13
g) Video .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 15
h) App Center ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 15
i) Web browser .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 15
Using the virtual keyboard ........................................................................................................................................................................ 15
Special character input ............................................................................................................................................................................. 16
Using the web browser ............................................................................................................................................................................. 16
j) Applications overview ............................................................................................................................................................................ 17
Applications overview ............................................................................................................................................................................... 17
k) System settings..................................................................................................................................................................................... 17
Settings overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 18
10.) Sending / Receiving E-Mails .............................................................................................................................................................. 18
Setting up your e-mail box ........................................................................................................................................................................ 18
Managing email accounts ......................................................................................................................................................................... 19
Viewing e-mail messages ......................................................................................................................................................................... 19
Writing email messages ............................................................................................................................................................................ 20
11.) Managing Applications....................................................................................................................................................................... 20
Installing applications ................................................................................................................................................................................ 20
Uninstalling applications ........................................................................................................................................................................... 20
12.) File Manager ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 21
How to navigate through Data Files and Folders ...................................................................................................................................... 21
Using the Toolbar ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 21
Copy, move and rename data files and folders ......................................................................................................................................... 22
13.) Reading Office Documents ................................................................................................................................................................ 22
14.) Task Manager .................................................................................................................................................................................... 23
15.) Limited Warranty Terms .................................................................................................................................................................... 23
16.) Technical Data ................................................................................................................................................................................... 24
17.) Maintenance of the Device ................................................................................................................................................................ 24
18.) Cleaning the Device........................................................................................................................................................................... 24
19.) Disposal of Used Electronic Equipment ............................................................................................................................................. 24
20.) Licenceinformation about GNU/LGPL................................................................................................................................................ 25
EC Declaration of Conformity........................................................................................................................................................................ 29

EN - 1

This manual may not contain all the features of your device. For the use of third-party applications, please contact the
respective manufacturer. Please note that all details can be modified without previous announcement. Current information
can be found at www.intenso.de.
Trademarks
Google, the Google logo and Android are trademarks of Google. All other product or service names are the property
of their respective owners.

2.) Notes

Avoid hard impacts to the device. Do not place it on inclined surfaces to prevent the device from
falling down.

Do not use the device in extremely cold, hot, humid or dusty areas; also do not expose to direct
sunlight.

Do not use it on sandy places.

Do not use it in hazardous environments, such as fuelling pumps at petrol stations.

Avoid using it on cushions, sofas or other objects that foster heat generation, due to the risk of
overheating.

Perform frequent data backups to avoid potential data loss. We are not liable for any loss of
data.

Do not disconnect when data is being transferred or the device formatted. This can cause data
loss.

Images and movies can be protected by third-party rights. Playing without a license can violate
copyrights.

Avoid use in highly magnetic fields.

Protect the unit from moisture. Should moisture enter the unit, please turn it off immediately,
clean it and dry the unit.

Please do not use chemical solvents to clean the device. Use only a dry cloth.

Do not place open flames, such as lighted candles, near or on the device.

We are not liable for damages caused by malfunctions, data losses, incorrect handling, own
repairs to the device or changing of the batteries.

Should the device not respond to your requests, please restart the device by pressing the reset
button on the back of it.

When not in use, please disconnect the mains adaptor from the power supply.

The outlet must be near the equipment and easily accessible.

Only use the AC adapter with grounded outlets with AC 100-240V, 50/60 Hz. If you are not sure
about the power supply at installation site, please ask the relevant energy services.

Use only the included AC adapter and power cord.


EN - 2

To interrupt the power supply to your unit, unplug the AC adapter from the outlet. Always hold
the adapter firmly when disconnecting the power supply. Never pull on the line.

Do not open the housing of the power adapter. With open housing, there is danger of electrical
shock. It contains no user-serviceable parts.

When not in use, the battery of the device discharges slowly. Prior to reuse it must be
recharged.

Please observe environmentally sound disposal of the device and the battery.

Please do not disassemble into parts or try to repair it yourself because in these cases the
warranty expires.

Do not use the device in places where the use of mobile devices is prohibited. Do not use the
device in the vicinity of other electronic devices because the high-frequency signals can cause
interferences.

Do not use it near a pacemaker, in a hospital or near medical equipment, because the highfrequency signals may cause interferences. Keep a distance of at least 15 cm from a
pacemaker. Please contact the manufacturer of these devices to obtain information about joint
use.

The use of earbuds or headphones at high volumes can lead to permanent hearing damage.

For reasons of traffic safety, the device may not be operated by the driver himself while driving.

EN - 3

3.) Device overview

1.)

On / Off button: Press and


hold to turn the unit off, press
briefly to switch between
standby and active mode

5.)

Micro SD Card slot

6.)

Volume +/-

2.)

3.5mm headphone jack

7.)

Touchscreen

3.)

Micro USB Socket

8.)

Front Camera

4.)

DC 5V 2A input

4.) Package contents


Please check if the contents are complete:

TAB 714
Stereo headphones
USB cable
Power supply 5V 2.0A
User Manual
USB Dongle

EN - 4

5.) Charging the battery


Please charge the battery completely before first use of the device. Connect the included power
adapter to the device and a power outlet. The full charge takes approximately 5 hours.
The charge condition will be displayed you during operation. In case of an active display lock, the actual
charge condition will be displayed you in percentage.
If the equipment is switched off, if you press shortly a key in any order a battery symbol will be shown on the
display. During the charge process by an animation the filling of the battery will be displayed in many levels.
If the battery is fully loaded, the animation will stop and the battery will be displayed completely.

Notes
a. With 15% remaining residual power of the battery you will get a warning message on the display. To recharge the battery, you
should now connect the device using the AC adapter to an electrical outlet to avoid possible data loss and increase the battery life.
b. You can use the device while charging the battery. To ensure long-lasting battery life, we ask you not to use the device.
c. To ensure good performance, the built-in battery must be used frequently. If you use the device often, please charge the battery
fully at least once a month.
d. Make sure you use only the included AC adapter for charging.

6.) Using a Micro SD/SDHC Card


This device is able to read data directly from a Micro SD/SDHC memory card.
In order to use a Micro SD/SDHC memory card, slide the card into the opening provided at the bottom of
the device (I). Use the pre-installed Explorer (more information is to be found in the extensive
operating instructions), to be able to access the data provided on the memory card. For this, please
select the SD Card in the index of the Explorer.

7.) Transfer of Data between Device and Computer


1.) Connect the device using the included USB cable to a computer.
2.) On the device the screen for the USB connection is now displayed. Tap briefly "Turn on USB
Storage". The device is recognized as a removable disk and you get the info "USB memory in use".
After briefly tapping the home button you can continue to use your device normally. You have now
have access to the internal memory of the device from your computer and can copy, delete or
transfer files to your device.
3.) If an USB connection with the computer exists, the USB icon is displayed in the status bar. You can get
additional information in the extended status bar (click on the clock in the status bar to open it) and you
can activate or deactivate the USB connection.

EN - 5

Select `Turn off USB storage to deactivate the memory.

Select the function `Remove safely


computer.

on the computer to separate the device from the

Note: The pre-installed applications and the Android operating system take up some of the existing internal memory about 1 GB of
space is occupied. For this reason, you cannot dispose of the entire internal memory.

8.) Touchscreen
This device is operated via touchscreen. You can easily start applications by tapping the touchscreen
lightly with your fingers, enter texts on the virtual keyboard and switch between the individual main
screens by wiping in the respective direction.
Please remove the protective film from the display before using the device.
The touchscreen detects small electrical charges, as for example emitted by human fingers, and thus
determines the input point.
Use for input ideally your fingertips. Operation with a pen or other sharp objects is not possible.
The touchscreen should not be exposed to water or other electrical devices to avoid malfunctions and
permanent defects.

Notes
a.
If the touchscreen is not operated for two minutes, the device goes into standby mode. Briefly press the on / off button to switch to
active mode.
b.
To prevent unwanted input, a lock mode is activated automatically. Please unlock the keypad on the touchscreen by simply
dragging the lock icon from the bottom to the top of the screen. The device will now switch to the home screen. Touch the closed
lock
on the display and keep it pressed. Draw the lock now to the open lock
your finger from the display. The screen is now unlocked.

just appearing on the display and release

You can rotate the device in all directions. It has a sensor that directs the display automatically.

EN - 6

9.) The Home Screen


View

Unlocking the screen


If the touchscreen is not used for two minutes, the device changes into standby mode. Press the on/off
button for a short time to return to the active mode. The locked display is protecting against undesired
input. Touch the closed lock
on the display and keep it pressed. Draw the lock now to the open lock
just appearing on the display and release your finger from the display. The screen is now unlocked.

Drag the lock icon with your finger in the direction of the arrow

Advice: Draw the lock symbol to the appearing camera symbol to open the camera application directly.

Status bar
The status bar is to be found in the lower section of the starting screen. It has the following functions:
back

Recently used
programs

Home screen

Time

WLAN Connection

EN - 7

Battery

Here you will receive information on:

the last used programmes

the signal strength of the present WIFI connection

the time

the present status of the battery


You can carry out the following functions:

Call up the starting screen


Go back one step in the relevant called up menu
Call up the last used programmes

You can open the extended status bar with a short tap on the clock. Here the latest status messages
are displayed. Various quick accesses, for example access to the settings, are displayed, if you tap
the clock in the extended status bar again.
Adjusting the main screen
You can adjust the main screen easily to your individual needs. If you want to delete an icon, tap the icon
with your finger for a short while and then push it into the displayed X icon. Now take your finger from the
touchscreen and the icon is deleted.
If you want to position an icon from the application overview on the main screen, tap the icon in the
application overview for a short while and the main screen appears. Move the icon to the desired
position and take your finger from the touchscreen. The icon is now added to the main screen. If you
move an icon on another icon, a folder containing both icons is automatically created. Tap the folder to view
the containing icons and then select the desired icon by tapping it briefly.
You can also add widgets to the main screen. To do that, please tap the
button in the top right corner
of the main screen and the application menu will be opened. Now tap the word widgets. All widgets
available on the device are now presented to you. Adding a widget to the main screen works exactly like
adding an icon.
If you want to change your background image, just tap a free place on the main screen and keep pressing
the display until the background selection menu appears.

EN - 8

Using several home screens


Five main screens that can be individually set-up are provided. You can easily switch between them by
wiping the screen lightly to the left or right.

Pressing the home button will always take you automatically back to the middle home screen.

Pre-installed applications on the home screen


Various applications are pre-installed on the home screen:
-

Search bar for the Google search


Weather forecast
WiFi
Gallery
Music
Video
AndroidPIT (App Center)

A Link to Google search


B Application overview
C Global weather forecast
D Apps on the main screen
E Status bar: Back, Home, recently used
programmes, time, WiFi, battery status

EN - 9

a) Search bar for Google search

Tap the magnifier briefly to open the Google search function. Enter the desired search item using the
virtual keyboard and then press go. All available search results of the Google search will now be
displayed.
Tap the microphone to activate voice entry. You can now enter the desired search item by speaking
distinctly. The speech recognition will then offer multiple possible search items. Confirm the desired
item with a brief tap and the search results of the Google search will be presented to you.

Tip: With a rapid upward or downward movement the device quickly


scrolls through a list, after releasing the finger from the touchscreen. This
works for all displays that are larger than the screen.

Note: For this function, a wireless Internet connection is required.

b) Applications overview

Tap this icon to open the application overview. Here all applications installed on the device will be displayed.
You can start any application by tapping the corresponding icon.

EN - 10

c) Weather forecast
The weather forecast widget shows you at a glance the current time, date, weather conditions and
temperature at the set location.
To change the settings, please go to the applications overview and tap the Weather Forecast icon.
You can now make the desired changes.

Setting menu of the weather forecast


Note: For this function, a wireless Internet connection is required.

d) WiFi
To connect your device with the internet, you require a WIFI connection. In order to establish this, touch
the WIFI icon on the starting screen, or open the WIFI setting within Settings.
Note: Please note that a wireless network must be located within the range of your current location.

Automatic connection
Open the WIFI settings via the WIFI icon or via Settings. Here you can quite simply activate or deactivate
the WIFI function. Simply slide the virtual key from its position on to the left to deactivate the WIFI
function. The display changes to off.
To activate the deactivated WIFI function again, just slide the virtual key to the right.

On the right hand side of the WIFI settings, all available networks as well as all already used networks
are shown.

EN - 11

Tap on the desired network and, if required, enter the appropriate WiFi key (password) to establish a
connection.

Confirm the entered password, if necessary, by touching the enter key and then select Connect. After a
short while you are connected.
Notes
a) If the device goes into standby mode, WiFi is turned off automatically. This reduces power consumption and thus automatically
leads to a longer battery life. When the device returns to active mode, the WiFi will automatically re-connect. This may take a few
seconds.
b) The list of currently searchable WiFi networks will be updated automatically.
c)
If the WiFi function is enabled, the device automatically connects to an already configured network, provided it is within range.
d) If an unknown wireless network is in range, an information box will appear.

Manual connection
In order to search for an accessible WiFi network manually, please proceed as follows:
(1) Open the settings.
(2) Now open the WiFi settings and tap `Scan.
(3) Should the WiFi network not appear in the list of available networks then select the item `Add
network in order to enter the network SSID, the security protocol and the possibly related password.
Tap `Save to confirm your entries.

e) Gallery
Tap briefly on the Gallery icon to get an overview of all existing albums and images.
Select the desired gallery, and then again the desired image by short tapping. The image will now be
displayed full screen.

EN - 12

Tap the photo icon

to choose between different grouping options.

To view the next or previous image, just move the current image with
your finger to the left or right of the screen.

Place two fingers on the touchscreen and pull them apart to enlarge the
image continuously. If you merge the fingers again, the picture is infinitely
reduced. By tapping briefly twice on the touchscreen, the image is
automatically enlarged and by double-tapping again displayed in its
original size.

By briefly tapping the touchscreen, additional functions are available.

Tap the `Menu icon


to get additional options
Here you can start a slide show, edit, rotate, and cut the image, set
it as background image or view the image details.
Tap the dustbin icon

to delete the selected image.

Tap the sharing icon


via email.

in order to send the image, for instance

f) Music
Briefly tap the Music icon on the home screen or applications overview to open the music player.
In the following view you can choose to display your music sorted by Artist, Album, Songs, Playlists or
Now playing. Just tap briefly on the icon.

Artists

Shows all music files sorted according to the


individual artists.

Albums

Shows all music files sorted according to the


individual albums.

Songs

Shows all music files sorted by title.

Playlists

Displays the created playlists.

Now Playing

Jumps directly to the current playback.

Select by briefly tapping the name of the file and the music playback starts.
EN - 13

Playback Screen
(1) Now playing
(2) Shuffle activate / deactivate
(3) Repeat options:
a)
all titles will be repeated
b)
current title is repeated
c)
repetition is disabled
(4) Title details
(5) Next / Previous track
(6) Play / Pause
(7) Timeline

Tap the pause icon


to pause playback.
To resume playback, tap the play icon .
Tap the forward or backward icon
/
to play the previous or next title.
Tap a spot on the timeline to continue playing it right at this point.
Press the volume +/- keys on the side of the device to adjust the volume.
To open the preview the current playlist, tap on the playlist icon . Tap on a title to play it
directly.

To change the repeat mode, tap the repeat mode icon

To go to the home screen, tap briefly on the home button


. This will not stop the music
playback. You can for instance surf the browser on the Internet while listening to your music.
Just tap on the music icon again to go to back to playback.

In playback mode you can further adjust your settings. Tap briefly on the Menu button
Library a list of all existing music files will be displayed.
Party shuffle turns on/off Party Shuffle mode.
Add to playlist adds currently playing title to a playlist.
Delete deletes the current title.
Sound effects sets a sound effect to the music playback.

EN - 14

g) Video
Tap briefly on the Gallery icon in the home screen or the applications overview, to open the video
playback.
It will now display the video files in a list. Select the desired file by briefly tapping and the video will start.

h) App Center
The AndroidPIT App Center is already installed on the device. Here you will find various apps, reviews, a
blog and a forum.
For further information or assistance on use of the App Center, please visit the homepage of the provider
under www.androidpit.de.
Note: For this function, a wireless Internet connection is necessary.

i) Web browser
To launch the web browser, tap on the Browser icon
on the home screen.
To open a website, tap on the upper input field for the Internet address. The virtual keyboard now
opens and you can enter the address of the desired website. To open the website, tap "Go" or tap on
the arrow icon next to the input field.
Note: Not all networks provide Internet access. Some networks offer access only to other related local computers but not Internet
connection.

Using the virtual keyboard


Tap the box to open the virtual keyboard. You can now enter text or websites.
a. Caps lock (case sensitive)
b. Return button
c. Calling up the menu for numbers, characters and
special character input
d. Space bar (no character input)
e. Go (confirmation of your input)

EN - 15

Special character input


In order to enter a special character such as `, tap the `a key with your finger for a long time to call up
the special character menu. Now glide with your finger to the desired special character, for example an `
and take your finger from the display. You now have entered an `.

Using the web browser

You can scroll through the display by performing a vertical sweeping motion with your finger.
Please do not start the sweeping motion on a menu item or link because otherwise the existing link
will open.
To open an Internet link, simply tap on the link. The new page will open automatically.
Press the menu key
to open the web browser menu. Here multiple functions are provided. Among
other things you can refresh the opened website here, open a new tab, make offline websites
readable or switch to the web browser settings.
To return to the previous page, please press the back button
.
To go directly back to home screen, press the home button
.
To enter a text, tap the appropriate field and use the virtual keyboard for entering the text.

Note: For this function, a wireless Internet connection is required.

EN - 16

j) Applications overview
Tap briefly on the applications overview icon to open the applications overview. You will see a list of
all pre-installed applications as well as those you have already installed. Open the desired application
by briefly tapping the appropriate icon.

Applications overview

k) System settings
Tap the settings icon in the application menu to call up the system settings.

You can find the individual categories on the left side of the menu. The available setting options
are displayed by briefly pressing each selected menu item. Please note that possibly not all functions
offered by Android are compatible with the device.
When you have adjusted all settings you can return to the previous menu with the Return key
, or
switch to the main screen directly with the Home key

EN - 17

. Your entries will be saved automatically.

Settings overview
WiFi & Networks

WiFi

Here you can adjust the WiFi settings.

More

Here you can adjust additional network settings.


Specify the desired volume and sound for messages here. Also you can
activate or deactivate a confirmation sound when touching the screen and an
indication sound when unlocking the display lock.

Sounds

Display

alignment when rotating the device.


Idle state Adjust the delay before automatic display deactivation.
Font size set-up of the desired font size.

Device

User

Brightness Adjust display brightness.


Background Selection of the background.
Rotate display autom Activation or deactivation of the automatic display

Memory

Here you can get information about the internal memory and if inserted
about your MicroSD card. Also you can delete the memory content.

Battery

Here you can get information about the state of charge of the integrated
batteries.

Apps

Here you can manage installed applications and get information about them.

Accounts &
synchronisation

Here you can determine, if and how often the accounts created by you will be
synchronised.

Location services

Here you can allow multiple Android applications to determine and use you
current position via WiFi networks (e.g. Google Maps). You can also
determine, if Google may adapt search results and other services to your
location.

Security

Here you can set-up a screen lock, for example, or implement other securityrelevant settings.

Language & input

Here you can set your preferred language, for example, or add various words
to your personal dictionary or adjust.

Save & reset

Here you can save your system settings and application data on Google
servers. Furthermore you can reset the factory settings. CAUTION: In doing
so, all data saved on the device will be deleted.

System

Date & time

Here you can set the date, time, time zone, and the display format.

About the Tablet

Shows additional information about the device.

10.) Sending / Receiving E-Mails


An e-mail application is pre-installed in this device. You can use your existing e-mail address to send
and receive e-mails.
Note: For this function, a wireless Internet connection is required .

Open the application with the "Email" icon which is found on the application menu.

Setting up your e-mail box


(1) Start the e-mail application by tapping on the Email icon. You are now prompted to set-up your e-mail
account.
(2) Enter your e-mail address and the corresponding password and then tap "Next". Then name your
account and fix the name that will be displayed on outgoing messages. Tap "Done" to complete
the set-up. Your e-mail mailbox is selected as the default mailbox if you select the option "Send emails from this account by default".
(3) You can set up your e-mail account manually as well. Enter your e-mail address and associated
password and then tap on "Manual Setup" to enter the e-mail server information.
EN - 18

(4) Choose from the server types POP3, IMAP or Exchange for incoming e-mails.
Note: If you do not know what settings you need to make, please contact your e-mail provider, your network administrator or search
terms such as "POP address" and "name of your provider" for the required information on the Internet.

(5) Enter the required information (server, port, etc.).


(6) Select the server type for outgoing e-mails and enter the required information.
(7) Tap "Next" to continue in the menu. The e-mail application will check the server settings made.
After successful set-up you will see the message: "Your account is set up, and email is on its
way". Your account is now set up.
(8) Enter a name for your mailbox, then tap "Done" to complete the process.
Note: If you have more than one email account, each time you start the e-mail application, the default account is called up.

Managing email accounts


Adding a new mailbox:
(1) Open the email application and tap the menu key
to display additional options. Select the menu
item `Settings and subsequently `Add account to create a new mailbox.
(2) Follow the instructions of the Setup Wizard to create a new mailbox.

Deleting a mailbox:
(1) Open the email application and tap the menu key
to display additional options. Select the menu
item `Settings and subsequently `Delete account to delete the desired mailbox.

Checking the account properties:


(1) Open the email application and tap the menu key
to display additional options and then select
`Settings. All already created mailboxes will now be displayed on the left side of the menu.
(2) Tap the desired mailbox to display the account settings.
(3) Tap the `Account setting you wish to change in order to make the desired entries.

Viewing e-mail messages


Open the e-mail application by briefly tapping the e-mail icon. The mailbox you already created is
displayed.

EN - 19

You can scroll through your e-mail with a vertical sweeping motion.
Tap briefly on a particular e-mail to open it.
Tap and hold your finger on a particular e-mail in order to display more options an info box will
be displayed. You can now open, reply, forward or delete the e-mail.

Writing email messages


(1) Tap the Email icon in the top menu bar of the email overview and a new window will open, where you
can write a new email.
(2) Now enter the email address of the recipient, a subject line and the text into the designated fields.
You can also add `Cc/Bcc to send this email to several users.
(3) Tap `Send to send the email. Tap `Save to save the entered email as a draft. When you tap the
`dustbin icon, the currently entered email will be deleted.

11.) Managing Applications


Pre-installed applications
This device is delivered with pre-installed applications. You will find an overview of the applications
already installed in the application overview
. These include the video player, audio player, Internet
browser, alarm, calculator and others. To open one of these applications, tap on the corresponding
icon.

Installing applications
To install applications on the device, perform the following steps:
(1) Download the software (for example, from the Androidpit Market). Make sure that it is an APK File.
(2) If you have downloaded the files on your computer, connect the device via USB cable to your
computer and copy the files to the internal memory.
(3) Unplug the unit from the computer and open the Explorer to open the copied files.
(4) To install the application, follow the installation instructions appearing on the screen.
(5) After successful installation, you will find the new application in the applications menu.

Uninstalling applications
(1) Open the system settings by briefly tapping the settings icon in the application overview.
(2) Now tap the menu item `Apps briefly to get to the application settings.
(3) Choose the desired application overview in the menu items `Download, USB memory, active and all
by tapping it briefly.
(4) Now select the application you want to deinstall by tapping it briefly.
(5) Now tap `Deinstall and confirm your entry with OK to deinstall the application from the device.
Note: You cannot delete pre-installed software.

EN - 20

12.) File Manager


Open the Application overview and quickly tap the File Manager icon in order to start the File Manager.

How to navigate through Data Files and Folders


You can select from the internal memory, memory card (if used for the Tablet), USB (if connected
to the Tablet), all available image files as well as all available video files. Tap on the desired file
location, in order to see the list of all therein contained data files or select the icon for images- or
video folders, in order to view all folders of this type.
Swipe the screen vertically to scroll through your data files and folders. Open a data file or a
folder by a quick tap.

You can move one step back by a quick tap on the relevant icon

Using the Toolbar

Go directly to the main directory.

Internal memory

Micro SD Card (if used for a Tablet)

USB memory (if connected to the tablet)

Shows all available images

Shows all available videos

This will show you all currently running processes.

Editor: With this you can paste data files, delete, make or move
a copy. Touch the desired data file and a green arrow appears
in front of the file name; subsequently select the desired
function.

EN - 21

Copy, move and rename data files and folders


1.)
2.)
3.)
4.)

5.)
6.)

Navigate to the desired data file in the data file overview.


Touch and hold your finger on the file until an info-field appears.
Select the desired function now. You can choose between Delete File, Rename File, Copy File
and Move File.
Quickly tap on the relevant icon (Copy / Move) for copying or moving and navigate to the
destination directory. Now touch the editor icon
and select Paste by a quick tap
to add the file.
Tap on Delete to delete a file and cofirm with Delete to be on the safe side. A quick tap on
Cancel cancels an action.
Tap on Rename File for renaming a file and then enter a new file name with the virtual
keyboard. Confirm your entry with Rename or cancel the process with Cancel.

13.) Reading Office Documents


The application "Office Suite" for reading Office documents has been pre-installed in this device. You
can read Word, Excel, or PowerPoint files.
1.)
2.)
3.)
4.)

Copy the desired Office files to the device.


Open the application "Office Suite ".
Navigate using the Explorer to the desired file.
Select the desired file with a short tap and swipe your finger vertically or horizontally across
the screen to scroll between pages. Briefly tap the menu button to open more options.
You can, for example, search for a certain text or count words.

EN - 22

14.) Task Manager


This device is capable of multitasking, allowing you use several applications at once. For example, you
can listen to music and at the same time surf the Internet or view images.
In some circumstances it may happen that too many applications are running simultaneously in the
background. In this case, please open the application "Task Killer" and terminate those applications
you do not need right now.

(1)

Open the "Task killer" application.

(2)

Select the applications you do not


currently need.

(3)

To confirm your selection, please tap briefly on the "Kill selected apps" icon.

15.) Limited Warranty Terms


The warranty covers only the replacement of this Intenso product. The warranty does not cover normal wear
and tear resulting from faulty, improper use, negligence, accident, incompatibility, or poor performance of
specific computer hardware or computer software.
There is no warranty in the case of non-compliance with the Intenso user manual, improper installation, use,
or defects caused by other equipment.
Warranty is also excluded if the product is subjected to the effects of vibration, electrostatic discharge, heat
or moisture beyond the product specifications.
Intenso is not liable for data loss or any collateral damage, or consequential damages, for breach of warranty
or for any other damage, whatever the underlying cause.
This product is not intended for commercial use or for medical and special applications in which the failure of
the product may cause injury, death or substantial property damage.

EN - 23

16.) Technical Data


CPU
Main memory
Operating system
Compatible operating systems
Connection options
Wireless
G-Sensor
Photo format
Audio format
Video format
Display
Camera
SNR
Frequency range
Power Supply
Internal Battery

1 GHz Cortex A8
512 MB DDR 3
Android 4.0.4
Windows XP / Vista / 7 / Linux 2.4 and higher / Mac 10.6 and
higher
Headphone, Micro SD (SDHC), Micro USB
WiFi (802.11 b/g/n)
360 degree rotation
JPEG, BMP, GIF, PNG
MP3, WMA, WAV, OGG, FLAC, APE
MPEG1, MPEG 4, FLV
TFT LCD display, 800 x 480 pixels
0,3 MP front camera
>= 80 dB
20 Hz 20 KHz
(V) AC adapter (Ktec KSAS0100500200HE): AC input 100240V50/60Hz, DC output 5V / 2A
Rechargeable lithium-ion polymer battery

17.) Maintenance of the Device


Never spray or apply a liquid directly onto the screen or casing.

18.) Cleaning the Device


Wipe the casing, frame and screen gently with a soft, lint-free cloth. Use only
detergents specifically designed for displays.

19.) Disposal of Used Electronic Equipment


Equipment marked with this symbol is subject to the European
Directive 2002/96/EC.
All electrical devices and used electrical equipment must be disposed
of separately from household waste over the appropriate government
agencies.
Proper disposal of old electronic equipment helps avoid
environmental damage.

EN - 24

20.) Licenceinformation about GNU/LGPL


Notice of GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE and LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENCE
Dear Customer,
If interested, you and any third party can download the source code of used GPL / LGPL from Intenso
Webpage http://www.intenso.de . The source code of the desired product is available to anyone on the
selection of valid product category and the desired device. In the product details you will find the entry
"drivers". Open this menu to download the corresponding GPL / LGPL code. For a fee of 35 (delivery to
another country as Germany), it is also possible to obtain this code by postal delivery. More information
about the GPL/LGPL-Licence can you nd on following website www.gnu.org
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast,
the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software-to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free
Software Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other
Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Lesser General Public License instead.) You can
apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are
designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this
service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the
software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you
to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of
the software, or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the
recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code.
And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives
you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.
Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is
no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its
recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not
reflect on the original authors' reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that
redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program
proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use
or not licensed at all.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder
saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below, refers to
any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" means either the Program or any derivative
work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or
with modifications and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without
limitation in the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you".
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside
its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if
its contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made by running the
Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any
EN - 25

medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright
notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of
any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty
protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the
Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided
that you also meet all of these conditions:
a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the
date of any change.
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from
the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of
this License.
c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when started
running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an
appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a
warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the user how to
view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an
announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not
derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as
separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the
Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other
licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you;
rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on
the Program.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work
based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under
the scope of this License.
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or
executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed
under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge no
more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the
corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium
customarily used for software interchange; or,
c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code.
(This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object
code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an
executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the
executable. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is
normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on)
of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the
executable.
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then
offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source
code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this
License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will
automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights,
from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full
compliance.
5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants
you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by
EN - 26

law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based
on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for
copying, distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it.
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatically
receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms
and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted
herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License.
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not
limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise)
that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If
you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other
pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a
patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies
directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance
of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to
contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free
software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made
generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent
application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software
through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this
License.
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by
copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an
explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in
or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in
the body of this License.
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public License
from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this
License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions
either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does
not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free
Software Foundation.
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are
different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software
Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will
be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of
promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE
PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE
STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE
PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE,
YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY
COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE
PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL,
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO
USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED
INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE
PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER
EN - 27

PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.


END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way
to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source
file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the "copyright"
line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
one line to give the program's name and an idea of what it does.
Copyright (C) yyyy name of author
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
GNU General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode:
Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author
Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details
type `show w'. This is free software, and you are welcome
to redistribute it under certain conditions; type `show c'
for details.
The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate parts of the General Public
License. Of course, the commands you use may be called something other than `show w' and `show c'; they
could even be mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a "copyright
disclaimer" for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright
interest in the program `Gnomovision'
(which makes passes at compilers) written
by James Hacker.
signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1989
Ty Coon, President of Vice

EN - 28

Intenso GmbH
Date: 12th July 2013

EC Declaration of Conformity
We, the company Intenso GmbH,
with headquarters located at:
Diepholzerstr. 15 in 49377 Vechta, Germany
Declare under our sole responsibility that the product:
Model: 7 TAB 714 (item no. 5509852)
Description: Tablet computer
is in conformity with the provisions of the following Council Directives:
Directive R&TTE 1999/5/CE

EN 301 489-1 V1.9.2

EN 301 489-17 V2.1.1

EN 300 328 V1.7.1 : 2006-10

EN 55022:2010 (Class B)

EN 55024:2010

EN 61000-3-2:2006+A1 :2009+A2 :2009 (Class D)

EN 61000-3-3:2008
Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC

EN 60950-1:2006+A11:2009+A1:2010+A12:2011+A12: correction 2012


Ecodesign Directive 2009/125/EC

1275/2008

278/2009
ROHS Directive 2011/65/EU
The technical documents related to the device mentioned above have been deposited at:

Intenso GmbH
Diepholzerstr. 15, 49377 Vechta. Germany
Authorized Representative:

______________________________
Executive Director: Thomas Phlking

EN - 29

Istruzioni per luso di TAB 714


Molte grazie per aver scelto il TAB714. La invitiamo a leggere e seguire le presenti istruzioni, che Le
forniranno informazioni relativamente alle pi importanti funzioni dellapparecchio.

1.) Indice
1.) Indice ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1
2.) Note ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2
3.) Quadro generale dellapparecchio ......................................................................................................................................................... 4
4.) Contenuto della confezione ................................................................................................................................................................... 4
5.) Caricamento della batteria ..................................................................................................................................................................... 5
6.) Utilizzo di una scheda Micro SD/SDHC ................................................................................................................................................. 5
7.) Trasmissione di dati tra lapparecchio e un computer ............................................................................................................................ 5
8.) Touchscreen .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 6
9.) La schermata iniziale ............................................................................................................................................................................. 7
Visualizzazione ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 7
Sblocco del display ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 7
Barra di stato .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 8
Adattamento della schermata di avvio ........................................................................................................................................................ 8
Utilizzare diverse schermate iniziali ............................................................................................................................................................ 9
Applicazioni gi installate sulla schermata iniziale ...................................................................................................................................... 9
a) Barra di ricerca per la ricerca Google................................................................................................................................................ 10
b) Men principale applicazioni ................................................................................................................................................................. 10
c) Previsioni meteo ................................................................................................................................................................................... 11
d) WIFI ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 11
Connessione automatica .......................................................................................................................................................................... 11
Collegamento manuale ............................................................................................................................................................................. 12
e) Galleria ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 12
f) Musica ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 13
g) Video .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 15
h) Centro apps .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 15
i) Browser internet ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 15
Utilizzo della tastiera virtuale .................................................................................................................................................................... 15
Inserimento di caratteri speciali ................................................................................................................................................................ 16
Utilizzo del browser internet ...................................................................................................................................................................... 16
j) Men principale applicazioni .................................................................................................................................................................. 17
k) Impostazioni sistema ............................................................................................................................................................................ 17
Impostazioni principali............................................................................................................................................................................... 18
10.) Invio / ricezione di e-mails ................................................................................................................................................................. 19
Configurazione della Sua casella di posta elettronica ............................................................................................................................... 19
Gestione degli account e-mail................................................................................................................................................................... 19
Visualizzazione delle e-mails .................................................................................................................................................................... 20
Scrivere messaggi e-mail.......................................................................................................................................................................... 20
11.) Gestione di applicazioni ..................................................................................................................................................................... 21
Installazione di applicazioni ...................................................................................................................................................................... 21
Disinstallazione di applicazioni ................................................................................................................................................................. 21
12.) File Manager ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 22
Navigare tra file e cartelle ......................................................................................................................................................................... 22
Utilizzare il toolbar .................................................................................................................................................................................... 22
Copiare, spostare e rinominare file e cartelle............................................................................................................................................ 23
13.) Lettura di documenti Office ................................................................................................................................................................ 23
14.) Task manager .................................................................................................................................................................................... 24
15.) Condizioni di garanzia limitate ........................................................................................................................................................... 24
16.) Dati tecnici ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 25
17.) Manutenzione dellapparecchio ......................................................................................................................................................... 25
18.) Pulizia dellapparecchio ..................................................................................................................................................................... 25
19.) Smaltimento di vecchi apparecchi elettrici ......................................................................................................................................... 25
20.) Licenza informazione ......................................................................................................................................................................... 26
Dichiarazione di conformit .......................................................................................................................................................................... 30

IT - 1

Questo manuale non contiene eventualmente tutte le funzioni del Suo apparecchio. Per lutilizzo di applicazioni derivanti da
fornitori terzi, contatti il rispettivo fornitore. Consideri che tutte le informazioni possono essere modificate senza preavviso.
Pu trovare informazioni attuali su www.intenso.de.
Marchio di fabbrica
Google, il logo Google e Android sono marchi di Google. Tutti gli altri nomi di prodotti e servizi sono propriet del
rispettivo possessore.

2.) Note

Evitare forti impatti sullapparecchio. Non depositarlo su superfici oblique al fine di evitare una
caduta.

Non utilizzare lapparecchio in zone estremamente fredde, calde, umide o polverose. Non
esporlo alla luce solare diretta.

Evitare lutilizzo in posti sabbiosi.

Non utilizzare lapparecchio in zone a rischio desplosione, come ad esempio distributori di


carburante presso una stazione di servizio.

Evitare lutilizzo su cuscini, divani o altri oggetti che supportano una potenziale fonte di calore, in
quanto si creerebbe pericolo di surriscaldamento dellapparecchio.

Esegua spesso il backup dei dati per evitare una loro possibile perdita. Non siamo responsabili
per eventuali perdite di dati.

Non interrompere la connessione mentre i dati vengono trasmessi o lapparecchio viene


formattato. Potrebbe verificarsi la perdita dei dati.

Immagini e video possono essere protetti da diritti di terzi. La loro esecuzione senza licenza pu
violare diritti di copyright.

Evitare lutilizzo in presenza di forti campi magnetici.

Proteggere lapparecchio dallacqua. Se dellumidit penetrasse nellapparecchio, spegnerlo


immediatamente, quindi pulirlo e asciugarlo.

Non utilizzare soluzioni chimiche per pulire lapparecchio. Utilizzare solo un panno asciutto.

Non collocare in prossimit dellapparecchio fiamme aperte, ad esempio candele accese.

Non siamo responsabili per danni causati da un malfunzionamento per perdita di dati, utilizzo
improprio, riparazione per conto proprio dellapparecchio o sostituzione della batteria.

Se lapparecchio non dovesse reagire ai comandi, utilizzare il pulsante reset sul retro
dellapparecchio per riavviarlo.

Se lapparecchio non viene utilizzato, staccare lalimentatore della corrente.

La presa deve trovarsi nei pressi dellapparecchio ed essere facilmente accessibile.

Utilizzare ladattatore solo con prese con messa a terra da AC 100-240V~, 50/60 Hz. In caso
dinsicurezza riguardo lalimentazione di corrente presso la collocazione dellapparecchio,
informarsi presso il fornitore denergia in questione.
IT - 2

Utilizzare solo il cavo delladattatore e di rete in fornitura.

Per interrompere lalimentazione di corrente allapparecchio, estrarre lalimentatore dalla presa.


Tenere sempre ben fermo il trasformatore mentre lo si estrae. Non tirare mai il filo.

Non aprire lalloggiamento delladattatore. Aprendo lalloggiamento sussiste pericolo di morte


per scossa elettrica. Non contiene componenti che possono essere riparate.

Se non si utilizza lapparecchio per lungo tempo, la batteria si scarica lentamente. Prima del
riutilizzo, questultima devessere quindi ricaricata.

Smaltire lapparecchio o la batteria nel rispetto dellambiente.

Non scomporre lapparecchio in pezzi singoli e non cercare di ripararlo per conto proprio, in
quanto la garanzia in questo caso decadrebbe.

Non utilizzare lapparecchio in posti dove lutilizzo di apparecchi mobili vietato. Non utilizzare
lapparecchio in prossimit di altri apparecchio elettronici, in quanto potrebbe verificarsi
uninterferenza col segnale dalta frequenza.

Non utilizzare lapparecchio nei pressi di pacemaker, in un ospedale o nei pressi di apparecchi
medici, in quanto potrebbe verificarsi uninterferenza col segnale dalta frequenza. Rivolgersi al
produttore di questo apparecchio per ricevere informazioni su un utilizzo in concomitanza con
altri dispositivi.

Utilizzando cuffie e auricolari con un volume troppo alto, possono verificarsi danni permanenti
alludito.

Per motivi di sicurezza nel traffico, lapparecchio non pu essere utilizzato durante la guida dal
conducente stesso.

IT - 3

3.) Quadro generale dellapparecchio

1.)Tasto On / Off: premere a lungo per


spegnere lapparecchio; premere
brevemente per passare dalla modalit
standby alla modalit attiva

5.)Slot per micro scheda SD


6.)Volume +/7.)Touchscreen

2.)Porta 3.5mm per cuffie


8.)Fotocamera frontale
3.)Porta micro USB
4.) Ingresso DC 5V 2A

4.) Contenuto della confezione


Verificare la completezza del contenuto del pacchetto:

TAB 714
Cuffie stereo
Cavo USB
Trasformatore 5V 2.0A
Istruzioni
USB Dongle

IT - 4

5.) Caricamento della batteria


Caricare completamente la batteria dellapparecchio prima dellutilizzo iniziale. Collegare a questo
scopo il trasformatore dotato in fornitura allapparecchio e ad una presa. Il caricamento completo dura
circa 5 ore.
Le condizioni di carica durante loperazione vengono visualizzate nella barra di stato. In presenza del bocco
attivato del display le condizioni di carica vengono indicate in punti percentuali.
In condizioni spente con una breve pressione su un tasto qualsiasi sul display viene visualizzato un simbolo
della batteria. Durante il procedimento di carica viene con unanimazione viene rappresentato il riempimento
della batteria in diversi livelli. Se la batteria completamente carica, lanimazione termina e la batteria viene
indicata completamente.

Nota:
a. Quando la carica rimasta della batteria raggiunge il 15%, ricever un avviso sul display. Dovrebbe quindi ricaricare la batteria
tramite il trasformatore inserito in una presa, al fine di evitare la perdita di dati e aumentare la durata della batteria.
b. Pu utilizzare lapparecchio mentre la batteria viene ricaricata. Per garantire una lunga durata della batteria, opportuno non
utilizzare lapparecchio nel frattempo.
c. Per garantire una buona performance, la batteria incorporata devessere utilizzata spesso. Se utilizza solo raramente lapparecchio,
carichi completamente la batteria minimo una volta al mese.
d. Si assicuri di utilizzare solo il trasformatore dotato in fornitura per il caricamento.

6.) Utilizzo di una scheda Micro SD/SDHC


Questo apparecchio pu leggere dati direttamente da una micro scheda SD/SDHC.
Per utilizzare una micro scheda SD/SDHC, inserire la scheda nellapposito vano sul lato posteriore
dellapparecchio (I). Utilizzare lExplorer gi installato (ulteriori informazioni a riguardo sono
disponibili nel manuale distruzioni dettagliato) per accedere ai dati presenti sulla scheda di memoria.
Selezionare nellExplorer la directory SD Card.

7.) Trasmissione di dati tra lapparecchio e un computer


1.) Collegare lapparecchio con laiuto del cavo USB allegato con un computer.
2.) Sullapparecchio comparir quindi la schermata per il collegamento USB. Toccare brevemente
Attivare memoria USB. Lapparecchio verr riconosciuto come supporto di memoria rimuovibile e
ricever il messaggio Memoria USB in utilizzo. Dopo aver toccato brevemente il tasto Home, si
potr continuare ad utilizzare normalmente lapparecchio. Avr ora accesso dal Suo computer alla
memoria interna dellapparecchio e potr copiare, cancellare o spostare files sullapparecchio.
3.) Se vi una connessione USB con il computer, nella barra di stato si vedr il simbolo USB. Nella barra di
stato ampliata (per aprirla premere brevemente sullorologio che si trova nella barra di stato) sono
disponibili maggiori informazioni ed possibile attivare o disattivare la connessione USB.

IT - 5

Per disattivare la memoria, selezionare Disattiva memoria USB.

Sul computer selezionare la funzione Rimozione sicura


computer.

, per staccare il dispositivo dal

Nota: Le applicazioni gi installate e il sistema operativo Android occupano una parte della memoria interna circa 1 GB di spazio
richiesto. Per questo motivo non a Sua disposizione lintera memoria interna.

8.) Touchscreen
Questo dispositivo viene comandato mediante un touch screen. Toccando lievemente con le dita il touch
screen si possono avviare in modo molto semplice le applicazioni, inserire testi sulla tastiera virtuale e
scorrendo nella relativa direzione, si pu navigare tra le diverse schermate.
Rimuova la pellicola di protezione dal display prima di utilizzare lapparecchio.
Il touchscreen riconosce cariche elettriche minime, come ad esempio quella trasmessa dal dico umano e
stabilisce cos il punto dinserimento.
Si consiglia quindi di utilizzare la punta delle dita per linserimento. Lutilizzo con un pennino o un altro
oggetto appuntito non possibile.
Il touchscreen non dovrebbe entrare in contatto con lacqua o altri dispositivi elettrici, al fine di evitare
malfunzionamenti e difetti permanenti.

Nota:
a.
Se il touchscreen non viene utilizzato per due minuti, lapparecchio passa nella modalit standby. Premere brevemente il tasto On
/ Off per passare alla modalit attiva.
b.
Per evitare inserimenti involontari, il blocco tasti si attiva automaticamente. Sbloccare i tasti dal touchscreen. Trascinare a questo
scopo il simbolo del lucchetto dal basso verso laltro sul display. Lapparecchio passer ora alla schermata iniziale. Toccare il
lucchetto chiuso
sul display e tenerlo premuto. Trascinare quindi il lucchetto sul lucchetto aperto
rilasciare il dito dal display. Lo schermo ora sbloccato.

appena comparso e

Pu girare lapparecchio in tutte le direzioni. Dispone di un sensore che orienta automaticamente il


display.

IT - 6

9.) La schermata iniziale


Visualizzazione

Sblocco del display


Se il touchscreen non viene utilizzato per due minuti, lapparecchio passa automaticamente alla modalit
standby. Premere brevemente il tasto on / off per passare alla modalit attiva. Il display bloccato per
impedire digitazioni involontarie. Toccare il lucchetto chiuso
sul display e tenerlo premuto.
Trascinare quindi il lucchetto sul lucchetto aperto
appena comparso e rilasciare il dito dal display. Lo
schermo ora sbloccato.

Trascini il simbolo del lucchetto con le dita nella direzione della freccia.

Nota: Trascinare il simbolo del lucchetto sul simbolo comparso della fotocamera per aprire direttamente
lapplicazione della fotocamera.

IT - 7

Barra di stato
La barra di stato si trova nella parte inferiore dello schermo. Possiede le seguenti funzioni:
Indietro

Ultimi programmi
utilizzati

Apre la schermata Home

Ora

Batteria

Collegamento WLAN

Qui ottenete informazioni riguardo:

i programmi usati di recente


la potenza del segnale dellattuale connessione WIFI
lorario attuale
lo stato di carica attuale della batteria

Potete eseguire le seguenti operazioni:

avviare la schermata davvio


tornare indietro di un passo nel men attualmente aperto
consultare i programmi usati di recente

Toccando delicatamente lorologio si apre la barra di stato ampliata. Qui vengono visualizzati i
messaggi di stato correnti. Toccando ancora una volta lorologio nella barra di stato ampliata vengono
visualizzati diversi accessi rapidi, come per esempio, laccesso alle impostazioni
Adattamento della schermata di avvio
possibile adattare la schermata di avvio alle proprie esigenze individuali in modo molto semplice. Se si
vuole cancellare unicona, toccare un po pi a lungo con il dito licona e spostarla sul simbolo X scoperto.
Togliere ora il dito dal touch screen e licona viene cancellata.
Se si desidera spostare unicona dalla panoramica delle applicazioni alla schermata iniziale, premere un
p pi a lungo sullicona nella panoramica delle applicazioni: comparir la schermata iniziale. Spostare
licona nel punto desiderato e togliere il dito dal touch screen. Licona stata aggiunta alla schermata
iniziale. Se si posiziona unicona su unaltra icona, viene creata automaticamente una cartella che contiene
le due icone. Toccare la cartella per visualizzare le icone in essa contenute e selezionare poi toccandola
brevemente licona desiderata.
possibile anche aggiungere dei widgets alla schermata iniziale. Per farlo, toccare il
nellangolo
superiore destro della schermata iniziale per aprire il menu Applicazioni. Poi toccare la Widgets.
Verranno visualizzati tutti i widgets disponibili sul dispositivo. Laggiunta di un widget alla schermata
iniziale si effettua esattamente come laggiunta di unicona.
Se si desidera cambiare limmagine dello sfondo, toccare semplicemente un punto libero della schermata
iniziale e tenere premuto il dito sul display fino a che compare il menu di selezione dello sfondo.

IT - 8

Utilizzare diverse schermate iniziali


Sono a Sua disposizione cinque schermate individuali impostabili in modo personale. Con un leggero
sfioramento verso sinistra o destra, pu passare facilmente da una allaltra.

Premendo il tasto Home torner sempre automaticamente alla fermata iniziale nel mezzo.

Applicazioni gi installate sulla schermata iniziale


Sulla schermata iniziale sono gi installate diverse applicazioni:
-

Barra di ricerca per la ricerca Google


Previsioni meteo
Browser
Musica
Galleria
E-Mail
Impostazioni
AndroidPIT (App Center)

A Collegamento alla ricerca Google


B Panoramica applicazioni
C Meteo mondiale
D Apps sulla schermata di avvio
E Barra di stato: Indietro, Home, ultimi
programmi usati, ora, Wifi, stato batteria

IT - 9

a) Barra di ricerca per la ricerca Google

Toccare brevemente la lente di ingrandimento per aprire la funzione di ricerca di Google. Digitare il
concetto da cercare sulla e premere Via. Vengono visualizzati ora i risultati di ricerca disponibili della
ricerca con Google.
Toccare il microfono per attivare la ricerca vocale. Ora possibile inserire a voce il concetto da cercare,
pronunciandolo chiaramente. Il riconoscimento vocale propone diversi possibili concetti da cercare.
Azionare il concetto desiderato toccandolo brevemente e saranno visualizzati i risultati della ricerca
con Google.

Consiglio: Con un movimento rapido verso lalto o il basso dopo che ha


rilasciato il dito dal touchscreen, lapparecchio scorre velocemente
attraverso una lista. Questo funziona per tutte le visualizzazioni che sono
pi grandi del Display.

Nota: Per questa funzione necessario un collegamento WLAN ad internet.

b) Men principale applicazioni

Toccare questo simbolo per aprire la panoramica delle applicazioni. Qui vengono mostrate tutte le
applicazioni installate nel dispositivo. Toccando il relativo simbolo s pu avviare direttamente lapplicazione
desiderata.

IT - 10

c) Previsioni meteo
Il Widget previsioni meteo Le mostra in unocchiata lorario, la data, le condizioni metereologiche e la
temperatura attuali presso il luogo impostato.
Per modificare le impostazioni, passi al quadro generale delle applicazioni e tocchi licona Previsioni
meteo. Qui pu effettuare le modifiche desiderate.

Men impostazioni per le previsioni meteo


Nota: Per questa funzione necessario un collegamento WLAN ad internet.

d) WIFI
Per collegare lapparecchio a internet, necessario una connessione WIFI. Per stabilire questo
collegamento, toccate licona WIFI sulla schermata davvio o aprite le impostazioni WIFI dalle
impostazioni.
Nota: Consideri che una rete WLAN deve trovarsi nel raggio della Sua posizione attuale.

Connessione automatica
Aprite le impostazioni WIFI tramite licona WIFI o le impostazioni. Qui potete semplicemente attivare o
disattivare la funzione WIFI. Spostate linterruttore virtuale nella posizione on verso sinistra per
disattivare la funzione WIFI. La schermata passer a off.
Per riattivare la funzione WIFI disattivata, spostare semplicemente linterruttore virtuale verso destra.

Nelle impostazioni WIFI vengono visualizzate a destra tutte le reti disponibili e tutte le reti gi utilizzate.

IT - 11

Tocchi la rete desiderata e inserisca eventualmente la chiave WLAN (password) corretta per stabilire una
connessione.

Confermate leventuale password inserita premendo il tasto Enter e premete Collega. Dopo breve tempo
la connessione stabilita.
Nota:
a) Se lapparecchio passa nella modalit standby, la WLAN viene disattivata automaticamente. Questo riduce il consumo di corrente
e contribuisce cos ad una durata maggiore della batteria. Se lapparecchio passa di nuovo nella modalit attiva, il collegamento
WLAN verr ripristinato automaticamente. Questo pu durare qualche secondo.
b) La lista attuale delle reti WLAN trovate viene aggiornata automaticamente.
c)
Se la funzione WLAND attiva, lapparecchio si collegher automaticamente con una rete gi configurata, se si trova nel suo
raggio.
d) Se una rete WLAN sconosciuta si trova nei paraggi, viene visualizzato un campo con le relative informazioni.

Collegamento manuale
Per cercare manualmente una rete Wifi raggiungibile, procedere come segue:
(1) Aprire le Impostazioni.
(2) Aprire ora le Impostazioni Wifi e toccare Cerca.
(3) Se la rete Wifi non compare nellelenco delle reti disponibili, selezionare la voce Aggiungi rete per
inserire manualmente la rete SSID, il protocollo di sicurezza ed eventualmente la relativa password. Per
confermare i dati inseriti, toccare Salva.

e) Galleria
Tocchi brevemente licona Galleria per ottenere un quadro dinsieme di tutti gli album e le immagini
presenti.
Selezioni la galleria desiderata ed infine limmagine selezionata con un altro tocco breve. Limmagine
verr ora visualizzata a schermo intero.

IT - 12

Toccare il simbolo della foto

per scegliere tra le diverse possibilit di raggruppamento.


Per visualizzare limmagine successiva o precedente, trascini limmagine
attuale con il dito verso sinistra o destra dal display.

Metta due dita sul touchscreen e le trascini nella direzione opposta per
ingrandire limmagine progressivamente. Se ricongiunge nuovamente le dita,
limmagine si rimpicciolir progressivamente. Se tocca brevemente e
velocemente il touchscreen due volte, limmagine singrandir
automaticamente e con un altro doppio tocco sar visualizzata nella
grandezza originaria.

Toccando brevemente il touchscreen saranno a Sua disposizione ulteriori funzioni.

Toccare il simbolo Menu


per ricevere altre opzioni.
Qui si possono attivare delle diapositive, elaborare limmagine,
ruotarla, tagliarla, impostarla come immagine di sfondo e
visualizzare i dettagli dellimmagine.
Toccare il simbolo del bidone della spazzatura
limmagine selezionata.
Toccare il simbolo Condividi
via e-mail.

per cancellare

per inviare limmagine, ad es.

f) Musica
Tocchi brevemente licona della Musica nella schermata iniziale o nel men principale delle
applicazioni per aprire la riproduzione musicale.
Nel seguente men principale pu scegliere di visualizzare la Sua musica in ordine secondo gli interpreti,
gli album, i titoli, la playlist o lelenco attuale. Tocchi a questo scopo brevemente il simbolo
corrispondente.
Interpreti

Mostra tutti i files musicali ordinati in base ai singoli interpreti.

Album

Mostra tutti i files musicali ordinati in base ai singoli album.

Titolo

Mostra tutti i files musicali ordinati per titolo.

Playlists

Mostra tutte le playlists presenti.

Elenco attuale

Va direttamente allelenco attuale.

Toccando brevemente, selezioni il nome del file desiderato e la riproduzione musicale verr avviata.
IT - 13

Schermata di riproduzione
(1) Riproduzione attuale
(2) Attivare / Disattivare la riproduzione causale
(3) Opzioni di ripetizione:
a)
Tutti i titoli vengono ripetuti
b)
Il titolo attuale viene ripetuto
c)
La ripetizione disattivata
(4) Dettagli titolo
(5) Titolo successivo / precedente
(6) Play / Pausa
(7) Barra di avanzamento

Tocchi il simbolo Pausa


per arrestare la riproduzione.
Per proseguire la riproduzione, tocchi il simbolo Play .
Tocchi sul simbolo Avanti o Indietro /
per riprodurre il titolo successivo o precedente.
Tocchi su un punto della barra di scorrimento per proseguire la riproduzione direttamente da quel
punto.
Premere i tasti volume +/- sul lato del dispositivo per regolare il volume.
Per aprire lanteprima della lista di riproduzione attuale, tocchi il simbolo della lista di
riproduzione . Tocchi un titolo per riprodurlo direttamente.
Per modificare la modalit di riproduzione, tocchi il simbolo della modalit di riproduzione .
Per raggiungere la schermata iniziale, tocchi il tasto Home
. La riproduzione musicale non
viene in questo modo arrestata. In tal modo pu ad esempio navigare in internet col browser e allo
stesso tempo ascoltare la musica. Tocchi di nuovo licona della Musica per ritornare alla
riproduzione musicale.

Nella modalit di riproduzione pu effettuare ulteriori impostazioni. Tocchi a questo scopo brevemente il
Tasto di Men

Biblioteca Viene visualizzato un quadro generale di tutti i files musicali presenti.


Party Shuffle Attivare o disattivare la modalit Party Shuffle.
Aggiungere alla playlist Aggiungere il titolo riprodotto al momento ad una playlist.
Cancellare Cancellare il titolo riprodotto al momento.
Effetti sonori Stabilire un effetto sonoro per la riproduzione musicale.

IT - 14

g) Video
Tocchi brevemente licona del Gallery nella schermata iniziale o nel quadro generale delle applicazioni
per aprire la riproduzione video.
Vengono visualizzati ora i files video in una lista. Selezioni il file desiderato toccando brevemente e il video
inizier.

h) Centro apps
Sullapparecchio gi installato il centro apps AndroidPIT. Qui pu trovare varie apps, report sui test, un
blog e un forum.
Per ulteriori informazioni o aiuti per lutilizzo del centro apps, visiti per cortesia lhomepage del fornitore su
www.androidpit.de.
Nota: Per questa funzione necessario un collegamento WLAN ad internet.

i) Browser internet
Per avviare il browser internet, tocchi licona del Browser
nella schermata iniziale. Per aprire un
sito internet, tocchi il campo superiore per inserire lindirizzo internet. La tastiera virtuale si aprir e poi
potr inserire lindirizzo del sito internet desiderato. Clicchi su Vai o sul simbolo della freccia di fianco
al campo dinserimento per aprire il sito internet.
Nota: Non tutte le reti offrono un accesso a internet. Alcune reti offrono un accesso ad altri computer collegati localmente e non un
collegamento a internet.

Utilizzo della tastiera virtuale


Tocchi il campo dinserimento per aprire la tastiera virtuale. Pu quindi inserire testi o aprire siti
internet.
a. Blocco maiuscole (caratteri minuscoli o maiuscoli)
b. Tasto per cancellare
c. Apertura del men per inserire numeri, lettere e
caratteri speciali
d. Barra spaziatrice (inserimento di uno spazio)
e. Vai (Conferma dellinserimento)

IT - 15

Inserimento di caratteri speciali


Per inserire un carattere speciale, come per esempio , toccare a lungo col dito il tasto a per richiamare
il menu dei segni speciali. Ora col dito trascinare il segno speciale che si desidera, per esempio e
staccare di nuovo il dito dal display. stata inserita una .

Utilizzo del browser internet

Pu far scorrere la visualizzazione sul display eseguendo un movimento di sfioramento in verticale


con il dito. Non inizi il movimento da un punto del men o da un link, altrimenti verr aperto il
collegamento presente.
Per aprire un link, tocchi semplicemente il link. La nuova pagina si aprir automaticamente.

Per aprire il menu Web Browser, premere il tasto menu


. Qui sono disponibili diverse funzioni. Fra le
altre cose, qui si pu aggiornare il sito web aperto, aprire un nuovo tab, rendere leggibili i siti web
offline oppure passare alle Impostazioni del Web Browser.
Per tornare indietro alla pagina precedente, prema il tasto Indietro
.

Per tornare indietro direttamente alla schermata iniziale, prema il tasto Home
.
Per inserire un testo, tocchi il campo corrispondente e utilizzi la tastiera virtuale per inserire il testo.

Nota: Per questa funzione necessario un collegamento WLAN ad internet.

IT - 16

j) Men principale applicazioni


Tocchi brevemente licona del Men principale applicazioni per aprire il men principale delle
applicazioni. Visualizzer quindi un quadro dinsieme di tutte le applicazioni predefinite e da Lei gi
installate. Apra lapplicazione desiderata toccando brevemente la relativa icona.

Men principale applicazioni

k) Impostazioni sistema
Toccare nel menu Applicazioni licona Impostazioni per richiamare le impostazioni di sistema.

Sul lato sinistro del menu si trovano le singole categorie. Premendo brevemente sulla voce di menu
che interessa, vengono visualizzate le possibilit di configurazione disponibili. Si prega di notare che
eventualmente alcune funzioni offerte da Android potrebbero non essere compatibili con questo
dispositivo.
Una volta eseguite tutte le impostazioni, con il tasto Indietro
si pu tornare al menu richiamato
per ultimo, oppure con il tasto Home
si pu passare direttamente alla schemata di avvio. Gli
inserimenti eseguiti saranno salvati automaticamente.

IT - 17

Impostazioni principali

Wireless & reti

Wifi

Eseguire qui le proprie impostazioni Wifi.

Altro

Qui si possono eseguire altre impostazioni di rete.


Qui si imposta il volume desiderato e il tono di avviso desiderato.
inoltre possibile attivare o disattivare un tono di conferma quando si tocca il
touch-screen e un tono di avviso quando si sblocca il blocco del display.

Suoni

Display

Luminosit adattamento della luminosit del display.


Sfondo selezione dello sfondo preferito.
Rotazione autom. display attivazione o disattivazione dellallineamento
automatico del display quando si ruota lapparecchio.
Riposo adattamento del ritardo prima dello spegnimento automatico del

Dispositivo

display.
Dimensione caratteri impostazione della dimensione carattere desiderata.
Memoria

Qui si trovano informazioni sulla memoria interna e se utilizzata su una


scheda Micro SD. inoltre possibile cancellare il contenuto della memoria.

Batteria

Qui si trovano informazioni sullo stato di carica della batteria integrata.

Apps

Qui si possono gestire le applicazioni installate e ricevere informazioni sulle


applicazioni.

Accounts &
sincronizzazione

Qui si pu definire se e con quale frequenza debbano essere sincronizzati i


propri accounts.

Servizi sede

Qui si pu permettere a diverse applicazioni Android di rilevare e usare la


Sua sede attuale per mezzo di reti wireless (p.es. Google Maps). inoltre
possibile definire se Google possa adattare i risultati di ricerca e altri
servizi alla Sua sede.

Sicurezza

Qui si pu configurare ad esempio il blocco dello schermo ed eseguire altre


impostazioni importanti per la sicurezza.

Lingua &
inserimento

Qui si pu impostare per esempio la propria lingua preferita, aggiungere


diverse voci al proprio vocabolario personale ed eseguire diverse

Utente

impostazioni per la tastiera.

Sistema

Salvare & resettare

Qui si possono salvare le proprie impostazioni di sistema e i dati delle


applicazioni su server Google. Inoltre si possono ripristinare le
impostazioni iniziali di fabbrica. ATTENZIONE: per farlo, vengono cancellati
tutti i dati salvati sul dispositivo.

Data & ora

Qui si possono definire data, ora, fuso orario e formato della visualizzazione.

Info sul tablet

Mostra informazioni sul dispositivo.

IT - 18

10.) Invio / ricezione di e-mails


Su questo apparecchio gi installata unapplicazione per le e-mails. Pu in questo modo utilizzare i Suoi
account gi esistenti per inviare e ricevere e-mails.
Nota: Per questa funzione necessario un collegamento WLAN ad internet.

Apra lapplicazione tramite licona E-Mail che si trova nel men delle applicazioni.

Configurazione della Sua casella di posta elettronica


(1) Avvii lapplicazione delle-mail toccando il simbolo E-Mail. Le verr quindi richiesto di configurare la
Sua casella di posta elettronica.
(2) Inserisca il Suo indirizzo e-mail e la relativa password, quindi tocchi Avanti. Infine dia un nome al
Suo account e stabilisca il Suo nome che deve essere visualizzato per la posta in uscita. Tocchi
Finito per concludere la configurazione. La Sua casella di posta elettronica viene selezionata come
casella standard se seleziona lopzione Inviare e-mails sempre da questo account.
(3) Pu configurare la Sua casella di posta elettronica anche manualmente. Inserisca il Suo indirizzo email e la relativa password, quindi tocchi infine Setup manuale per registrare le informazioni sul
server dellaccount.
(4) Selezioni il tipo di server POP3, IMAP o Exchange per ricevere le e-mails.
Nota: Se non sa come configurare le impostazioni, contatti il gestore del Suo account, il Suo amministratore di rete oppure cerchi in
internet le relative informazioni necessarie indicando termini come Indirizzo POP e Nome del mio provider.

(5) Inserisca le informazioni necessarie (server, porta ecc.).


(6) Selezioni il tipo di server per inviare le e-mails e inserisca le informazioni necessarie.
(7) Tocchi Avanti per procedere nel men. Lapplicazione delle-mail verificher le impostazioni del
server dellaccount. Dopo aver portato a buon fine la configurazione, visualizzerete il messaggio
Your account is set up, and email is on its way. Il Suo account ora configurato.
(8) Dia un nome alla Sua casella di posta e tocchi Finito per concludere la procedura.
Nota: Se dovesse possedere pi di un account, ad ogni avvio dellapplicazione delle-mail verr aperto laccount predefinito.

Gestione degli account e-mail


Aggiungere una nuova casella di posta:
(1) Aprire lapplicazione E-mail e toccare il tasto di menu
per visualizzare le altre opzioni. Selezionare
la voce di menu Impostazioni e poi Aggiungi account, per creare una nuova casella di posta.
(2) Seguire i tutorial di configurazione per creare una nuova casella di posta.

IT - 19

Cancellare una casella di posta:


(1) Aprire lapplicazione E-mail e toccare il tasto di menu
per visualizzare le altre opzioni. Selezionare
la voce di menu Impostazioni e poi Elimina account, per cancellare la casella di posta desiderata.

Controllo delle caratteristiche dellaccount:


(1) Aprire lapplicazione E-mail e toccare il tasto di menu
per visualizzare le altre opzioni e
selezionare Impostazioni. Sul lato sinistro del menu vengono ora visualizzate tutte le caselle di
posta gi create.
Toccare la casella di posta desiderata per visualizzare le impostazioni dellaccount.
(2) Toccare lImpostazione account da cambiare, per eseguire le modifiche desiderate.

Visualizzazione delle e-mails


Apra lapplicazione delle-mail con un breve tocco sullicona E-mail. Visualizzer la casella di posta gi
impostata.
Con un movimento di sfioramento in verticale pu far scorrere le e-mails.
Tocchi brevemente una certa e-mail per aprirla.
Tocchi e mantenga il dito su una certa e-mail per visualizzare le impostazioni avanzate. Apparir
quindi un campo informativo. Qui pu ora aprire le-mail, rispondere, inoltrarla o cancellarla.

Scrivere messaggi e-mail


(1) Nella schermata della e-mail, toccare il simbolo E-mail nella barra di menu superiore; si apre una
nuova finestra nella quale si pu scrivere una nuova e-mail.
Inserire ora lindirizzo e-mail del destinatario, un oggetto e il testo negli appositi campi. Si pu
aggiungere anche Cc/Bcc per inviare una e-mail a pi destinatari.
(2) Toccare la voce Invia, per inviare le-mail. Toccare Salva, per salvare come bozza le-mail creata.
Toccando il Simbolo cestino lattuale e-mail viene eliminata.

IT - 20

11.) Gestione di applicazioni


Applicazioni gi installate
Questo apparecchio viene fornito con delle applicazioni gi installate. Pu trovare una panoramica delle
applicazioni gi installate nel men principale delle applicazioni . Tra queste rientrano anche il video
player, laudio player, il browser internet, la sveglia, la calcolatrice e altre ancora. Per aprire una di
queste applicazioni, tocchi brevemente la rispettiva icona.

Installazione di applicazioni
Per installare applicazioni sullapparecchio, esegua i seguenti passi:
(1) Scarichi il software (ad esempio dallAndroipit Market). Si assicuri che si tratti di file APK.
(2) Una volta scaricato il file sul Suo computer, colleghi lapparecchio al Suo computer tramite il cavo
USB e copi i files sulla memoria interna.
(3) Scolleghi lapparecchio dal computer ed apra lExplorer per aprire i files copiati.
(4) Segua le istruzioni per linstallazione che appaiono sul display per installare lapplicazione.
(5) Dopo uninstallazione andata a buon fine potr trovare la nuova applicazione nel men delle
applicazioni.

Disinstallazione di applicazioni
(1) Aprire le Impostazioni di sistema toccando brevemente licona Impostazioni nella panoramica delle
applicazioni.
(2) Toccare ora la voce di menu Apps, per accedere alle Impostazioni delle applicazioni.
(3) Scegliere tra le voci principali di menu Scaricato, memoria USB, attivo e la panoramica applicazioni
desiderata toccandola brevemente.
(4) Poi, toccandola, selezionare lapplicazione che si vuole disinstallare.
(5) Toccare ora Disinstalla e confermare la scelta con OK, per disinstallare lapplicazione dal
dispositivo.

Nota: Non pu eliminare software gi installati in dotazione.

IT - 21

12.) File Manager


Aprire la panoramica delle applicazioni e toccare quindi brevemente licona del File Manager per avviare
il File Manager.

Navigare tra file e cartelle


Si pu selezionare la memoria interna, la scheda di memoria (se inserita nel tablet), lUSB (se
collegato al tablet) e tutte le immagini e video disponibili. Toccare la cartella di salvataggio
desiderata per visualizzare i file contenuti come lista, oppure seleziona licona delle immagini o
dei video per visualizzare tutti i file di questo tipo.
Con un movimento di sfioramento verticale possibile far scorrere i vari file e cartelle. Aprire un
file o una cartella tramite un breve tocco.

possibile tornare indietro di un passaggio

toccando brevemente la rispettiva icona.

Utilizzare il toolbar

Passare direttamente la men principale.

Memoria interna

Micro SD (se inserita nel tablet)

Memoria USB (se collegata al tablet)

Visualizza tutte le immagini disponibili

Visualizza tutti i video disponibili

Qui possibile visualizzare tutti i processi in corso.

Editor: qui possibile incollare o eliminare file, farne un copia o


spostarli. Toccando il file desiderato, apparir una freccia verde
davanti al nome del file. Selezionare infine lazione desiderata.

IT - 22

Copiare, spostare e rinominare file e cartelle


1.)
2.)
3.)
4.)

5.)
6.)

Navigare fino al file desiderato nella panoramica dei file.


Toccare e tenere il dito sul file fino a quando apparir un campo informativo.
Selezionare la funzione desiderata. Si pu scegliere tra eliminare il file (Delete file), rinominare
il file, copiare il file e spostare il file (Move File),
Per copiare o spostare il file, toccare brevemente la rispettiva icona (Copy / Move) e navigare
fino alla directory di destinazione. Toccare infine licona delleditor
e selezionare
con un breve tocco Paste per aggiungere il file.
Per eliminare un file, toccare Delete e confermare per sicurezza ancora una volta con
elimina. Per annullare loperazione, toccare brevemente annulla.
Per rinominare un file, toccare Rinomina file e inserire infine il nuovo nome tramite la
tastiera virtuale. Confermare linserimento con rinomina o interrompere lazione con
annulla.

13.) Lettura di documenti Office


Su questo apparecchio gi installata lapplicazione Office Suite per leggere Documenti di Office. Pu
leggere files Word, Excel o Powerpoint.

1.)
2.)
3.)
4.)

Copi i files desiderati di Office sullapparecchio.


Apra lapplicazione Office Suite.
Navighi con lExplorer fino al file desiderato.
Selezioni il file desiderato con un breve tocco e sfiori con il dito in verticale o orizzontale sul
display per sfogliare le singole pagine. Tocchi brevemente il tasto di men per aprire ulteriori
opzioni. Pu ad esempio cercare un determinato testo o contare le parole.

IT - 23

14.) Task manager


Questo apparecchio multitasking. Pu quindi aprire contemporaneamente pi applicazioni. Pu ad
esempio ascoltare musica e allo stesso tempo navigare in internet o guardare foto.
Pu eventualmente capitare che troppe applicazioni siano attive contemporaneamente sullo sfondo. In
questo caso apra lapplicazione Task Killer e termini quelle applicazioni di cui al momento non ha
bisogno.
(1)

Apra lapplicazione Task Killer.

(2)

(3)

Per confermare la Sua scelta, tocchi


apps.

brevemente il simbolo Kill selected

Selezioni le applicazioni di cui al


momento non ha bisogno.

15.) Condizioni di garanzia limitate


La garanzia copre solo la sostituzione di questo prodotto Intenso. La garanzia non vale per normale usura
derivante da uso errato o improprio, trascuratezza, incidente, incompatibilit o da altre prestazioni
manchevoli di un certo hardware o software.
Non sussiste garanzia col mancato rispetto delle istruzioni Intenso, cos come col montaggio e uso improprio
o con difetti causati da altri apparecchi.
Se il prodotto viene esposto a scosse, scariche elettrostatiche, calore o umidit non in conformit alle
specifiche del prodotto, non sussiste alcuna garanzia.
Intenso non responsabile per perdite di dati o per danni concomitanti e conseguenti, per la violazione delle
condizioni di garanzia o per altri danni indipendentemente dalla loro causa.
Questo prodotto non previsto per un uso commerciale o per applicazioni mediche o di altro genere dove il
mancato funzionamento del prodotto possa causare ferimenti, morte o notevoli danni materiali.

IT - 24

16.) Dati tecnici


CPU
Memoria
Sistema operativo
Sistemi operativi compatibili
Possibilit di collegamento
WLAN
Sensore G
Formato foto
Formato audio
Formato video
Display
Fotocamera
SNR
Campo di frequenza
Trasformatore
Batteria interna

1 GHz Cortex A8
512 MB DDR 3
Android 4.0.4
Windows XP / Vista / 7 / Linux 2,4 e pi recenti / Mac 10.6 e pi recenti
Cuffie, Micro SD (SDHC)
WiFi (802.11 b/g/n)
360 Grad Rotation
JPEG, BMP, GIF, PNG
MP3, WMA, WAV, OGG, FLAC, APE
MPEG1, MPEG 4, FLV
TFT LCD Display, 800 x 480 Pixel
Fotocamera frontale 0,3 MP
>= 80 dB
20 Hz 20 KHz
Adattatore (V) AC (Ktec KSAS0100500200HE): AC Input 100240V50/60Hz, DC Output 5V / 2A
Batteria ricaricabile agli ioni di litio-polimero

17.) Manutenzione dellapparecchio


Non spruzzare o applicare mai un liquido direttamente sul display o
sullalloggiamento.

18.) Pulizia dellapparecchio


Pulisca lalloggiamento, il telaio e il display con attenzione tramite un panno
morbido, non sfilacciato e privo di sostanze chimiche. Utilizzi detergenti solo
se sono previsti per displays.

19.) Smaltimento di vecchi apparecchi elettrici


Gli apparecchi contrassegnati da questo simbolo sono soggetti alla
direttiva europea 2002/96/EC.
Tutti gli apparecchi elettrici vecchi e non devono essere smaltiti
separatamente dai rifiuti domestici presso i luoghi previsti dallo stato.
Con uno smaltimento corretto dei vecchi apparecchi elettrici evita
danni allambiente.

IT - 25

20.) Licenza informazione


Notice of GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE and LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENCE
Dear Customer,
If interested, you and any third party can download the source code of used GPL / LGPL from Intenso
Webpage http://www.intenso.de . The source code of the desired product is available to anyone on the
selection of valid product category and the desired device. In the product details you will find the entry
"drivers". Open this menu to download the corresponding GPL / LGPL code. For a fee of 35 (delivery to
another country as Germany), it is also possible to obtain this code by postal delivery. More information
about the GPL/LGPL-Licence can you nd on following website www.gnu.org
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast,
the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software-to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free
Software Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other
Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Lesser General Public License instead.) You can
apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are
designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this
service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the
software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you
to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of
the software, or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the
recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code.
And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives
you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.
Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is
no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its
recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not
reflect on the original authors' reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that
redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program
proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use
or not licensed at all.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder
saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below, refers to
any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" means either the Program or any derivative
work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or
with modifications and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without
limitation in the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you".
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside
its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if
its contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made by running the
Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any
IT - 26

medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright
notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of
any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty
protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the
Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided
that you also meet all of these conditions:
a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the
date of any change.
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from
the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of
this License.
c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when started
running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an
appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a
warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the user how to
view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an
announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not
derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as
separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the
Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other
licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you;
rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on
the Program.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work
based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under
the scope of this License.
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or
executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed
under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge no
more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the
corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium
customarily used for software interchange; or,
c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code.
(This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object
code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an
executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the
executable. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is
normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on)
of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the
executable.
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then
offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source
code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this
License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will
automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights,
from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full
compliance.
5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants
you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by
IT - 27

law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based
on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for
copying, distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it.
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatically
receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms
and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted
herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License.
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not
limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise)
that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If
you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other
pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a
patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies
directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance
of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to
contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free
software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made
generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent
application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software
through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this
License.
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by
copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an
explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in
or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in
the body of this License.
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public License
from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this
License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions
either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does
not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free
Software Foundation.
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are
different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software
Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will
be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of
promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE
PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE
STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE
PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE,
YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY
COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE
PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL,
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO
USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED
INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE
PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER
IT - 28

PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.


END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way
to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source
file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the "copyright"
line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
one line to give the program's name and an idea of what it does.
Copyright (C) yyyy name of author
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
GNU General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode:
Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author
Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details
type `show w'. This is free software, and you are welcome
to redistribute it under certain conditions; type `show c'
for details.
The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate parts of the General Public
License. Of course, the commands you use may be called something other than `show w' and `show c'; they
could even be mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a "copyright
disclaimer" for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright
interest in the program `Gnomovision'
(which makes passes at compilers) written
by James Hacker.
signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1989
Ty Coon, President of Vice

IT - 29

Intenso GmbH
Data:12 luglio 2013

Dichiarazione di conformit
Noi, la Intenso GmbH,
con sede in Diepholzer Str. 15 a 49377 Vechta, Deutschland
dichiariamo su nostra responsabilit che il prodotto:
Modello: 7 TAB 714 (articolo n 5509852)
Descrizione: Tablet computer
conforme alle seguenti direttive e norme:
Direttiva R&TTE 1999/5/EG

EN 301 489-1 V1.9.2


EN 301 489-17 V2.1.1
EN 300 328 V1.7.1 : 2006-10
EN 55022:2010 (Class B)
EN 55024:2010
EN 61000-3-2:2006+A1 :2009+A2 :2009 (Class D)
EN 61000-3-3:2008

Direttiva Bassa Tensione 2006/95/EG


EN 60950-1:2006+A11:2009+A1:2010+A12:2011+A12:correzione 2012
Direttiva Ecodesign 2009/125/EG
1275/2008
278/2009
Direttiva ROHS 2011/65/EU
La documentazione tecnica riferita allapparecchio sopra citato stata depositata presso il
seguente luogo:
Intenso GmbH
Diepholzer Str. 15, 49377 Vechta, Deutschland
Persona autorizzata:

___________________________________
Amministratore delegato: Thomas Phlking
IT - 30

Mode d'emploi TAB 714


Merci d'avoir choisi TAB714. Suivez ces instructions pour connatre les fonctions cls de l'appareil.

1.) Contenu
1.) Contenu ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 1
2.) Remarques ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 2
3.) Aperu de l'appareil ............................................................................................................................................................................... 4
4.) Contenu de l'emballage ......................................................................................................................................................................... 4
5.) Chargement de la batterie ..................................................................................................................................................................... 5
6.) Utilisation d'une carte Micro SD / SDHC ................................................................................................................................................ 5
7.) Transmission de donnes entre l'appareil et un ordinateur ................................................................................................................... 5
8.) cran tactile ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 6
9.) L'cran d'accueil .................................................................................................................................................................................... 7
Affichage ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7
Dverrouillage de l'cran ............................................................................................................................................................................ 7
Barre d'tat ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 8
Rglage de l'cran principal ........................................................................................................................................................................ 8
Utiliser diffrents crans d'accueil ............................................................................................................................................................... 9
Applications prinstalles sur l'cran d'accueil ........................................................................................................................................... 9
a) Barre de recherche pour la recherche sur Google ........................................................................................................................... 10
b) Aperu des applications........................................................................................................................................................................ 10
c) Prvisions mtorologiques .................................................................................................................................................................. 11
d) WIFI ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 11
Connexion automatique ............................................................................................................................................................................ 11
Connexion manuelle ................................................................................................................................................................................. 12
e) Galerie .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 12
f) Musique ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 13
g) Vido .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 14
h) App Center ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 15
i) Navigateur Web ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 15
Utilisation du clavier virtuel ....................................................................................................................................................................... 15
Saisie de caractres spciaux .................................................................................................................................................................. 16
Utilisation du navigateur Web ................................................................................................................................................................... 16
j) Aperu des applications ......................................................................................................................................................................... 17
k) Paramtres systme ............................................................................................................................................................................. 17
Aperu des paramtres............................................................................................................................................................................. 18
10.) Expdition / rception des e-mails ..................................................................................................................................................... 19
Configuration de votre bote aux lettres lectronique ................................................................................................................................ 19
Grer les comptes d'emails....................................................................................................................................................................... 20
Affichage des e-mails................................................................................................................................................................................ 20
Ecrire des messages d'email .................................................................................................................................................................... 20
11.) Gestion des applications.................................................................................................................................................................... 21
Installation des applications ...................................................................................................................................................................... 21
Dsinstallation des applications ................................................................................................................................................................ 21
12.) Gestionnaire de donnes................................................................................................................................................................... 22
Naviguer travers les fichiers et dossiers ................................................................................................................................................ 22
Utiliser la barre doutils.............................................................................................................................................................................. 22
Copier, dplacer et renommer des fichiers ou dossiers ............................................................................................................................ 23
13.) Lecture de documents Office ............................................................................................................................................................. 23
14.) Gestionnaire des tches .................................................................................................................................................................... 24
15.) Conditions de garantie limite ........................................................................................................................................................... 24
16.) Donnes techniques .......................................................................................................................................................................... 25
17.) Entretien de l'appareil ........................................................................................................................................................................ 25
18.) Entretien de l'appareil ........................................................................................................................................................................ 25
19.) limination des vieux quipements lectroniques ............................................................................................................................. 25
20.) Licence information............................................................................................................................................................................ 26
Dclaration de conformit CE ................................................................................................................................................................... 30

FR - 1

Ce manuel ne contient peut-tre pas toutes les fonctions de votre appareil. Pour utilisation des applications de fournisseurs
tiers, veuillez contacter le fabricant. Veuillez noter que toutes les instructions peuvent tre modifies sans pravis. Vous
trouverez des informations actuelles l'adresse www.intenso.de
Marques
Google , le logo Google et Android sont des marques commerciales de Google . Tous les autres noms de produits
ou de services sont la proprit de leurs propritaires respectifs.

2.) Remarques

viter les chocs violents sur l'appareil. Ne pas le poser sur des surfaces inclines afin d'viter
que l'appareil ne chute.

Ne pas utiliser l'appareil dans des conditions extrmement froides, chaudes, humides ou
poussireuses. Ne pas exposer non-plus au rayonnement solaire direct.

viter d'utiliser sur des endroits sablonneux.

Ne pas utiliser dans des environnements prsentant un risque d'explosion, comme par exemple
aux pompes d'une station essence.

viter l'utilisation de coussins, canaps ou autres objets qui favorisent un dveloppement de la


chaleur, car il y a un risque de surchauffe de l'appareil.

Effectuer de frquentes sauvegardes de donnes, pour viter d'ventuelles pertes de donnes.


Nous ne sommes pas responsables dune perte de donnes ventuelle.

Ne pas dbrancher la connexion quand les donnes sont encours de transfert ou l'appareil en
cours de formatage. Ceci peut entraner la perte de donnes.

Les images et les films peuvent tre protgs des tiers par des droits. couter sans licence peut
violer les droits d'auteur.

viter l'utilisation dans des champs hautement magntiques.

Protger l'appareil de l'humidit. Si l'humidit pntre dans l'appareil, veuillez immdiatement


lteindre, puis veuillez nettoyer et scher l'appareil.

Veuillez ne pas utiliser de solvants chimiques pour nettoyer l'appareil. Veuillez n'utilisez ici qu'un
chiffon sec.
Ne pas placer de flammes nues, telles que des bougies allumes, proximit de l'appareil ou
sur celui-ci.
Nous ne sommes pas responsables des dommages en cas de fonctionnement dfectueux, ni
des pertes de donnes dues une mauvaise manipulation, une rparation de l'appareil par vos
propres moyens ou un changement de batterie.

Si pour une fois l'appareil venait ne pas rpondre vos entres, veuillez utiliser le bouton de
rinitialisation l'arrire de l'appareil pour le faire redmarrer.

Lorsqu'il n'est pas utilis, veuillez dbrancher l'adaptateur secteur de l'alimentation lectrique.

La prise doit se trouver dans les environs de l'appareil et tre facilement accessible.

N'utiliser l'adaptateur de courant que pour les prises relies la terre avec AC 100-240V~,
50/60 Hz Si vous n'tes pas sr de l'alimentation sur le lieu de montage, veuillez vous adresser
votre fournisseur d'nergie concern.
FR - 2

Veuillez utiliser uniquement ladaptateur de courant et le cble de raccordement au rseau


fournis.

Pour interrompre l'alimentation de votre appareil, dbranchez l'adaptateur secteur de la prise.


Tenir fermement l'adaptateur secteur en vous dconnectant. Ne tirez jamais sur le cble

Ne pas ouvrir le botier de l'adaptateur de courant. Lorsque le botier est ouvert, il existe un
danger de mort par lectrocution. Il ne contient aucune pice rparable.

Si elle n'est pas utilise de faon prolonge, la batterie de l'appareil se dcharge lentement.
Avant d'tre rutilise, celle-ci doit nouveau recharge.

Veuillez respecter l'limination cologique de l'appareil ou de la batterie.

Veuillez ne pas dmonter l'appareil en pices dtaches et veuillez ne pas tenter de le rparer
vous-mme, la garantie expirant dans ce cas.

Ne pas utiliser l'appareil dans des endroits o l'utilisation d'appareils mobiles est interdite. Ne
pas utiliser l'appareil proximit d'autres appareils lectroniques, car cela peut entraner des
troubles dus aux signaux haute frquence.

Ne pas utiliser l'appareil proximit d'un stimulateur cardiaque, dans un hpital ou proximit
d'quipement mdical, car cela peut entraner des troubles dus aux signaux haute frquence.
Garder au moins 15cm de distance avec un stimulateur cardiaque. Veuillez contacter le
fabricant de ces appareils pour recevoir des informations concernant l'utilisation commune.

Si vous utilisez des couteurs ou un casque un volume trop lev, cela peut entraner des
dommages auditifs permanents.

Pour des raisons de scurit routire, l'appareil ne peut pas tre utilis pendant la conduite par
le conducteur lui-mme.

FR - 3

3.) Aperu de l'appareil

1.)Touche On / Off : Appuyez


longuement pour mettre l'appareil
hors tension, appuyez brivement
pour alterner entre le mode veille et
actif.

5.)Emplacement carte Micro SD

2.)Prise casque de 3,5 mm

8.)Camra frontale

6.)Volume + / 7.)Touchscreen

3.)Emplacement Micro USB


4.)Entre DC 5V 2A

4.) Contenu de l'emballage


Veuillez vrifier l'intgralit du contenu de l'emballage :

TAB 714
Casque stro
Cble USB
Adaptateur secteur 5V 2.0A
Manuel d'utilisation
USB Dongle

FR - 4

5.) Chargement de la batterie


Veuillez charger la batterie compltement avant la premire utilisation de l'appareil. Pour cela,
connectez l'adaptateur secteur fourni l'appareil et une prise de courant. La charge complte
prend environ 5 heures.
Le niveau de charge apparait dans la barre dtat lorsque lappareil est en marche. Lorsque la fonction de
verrouillage de lcran est active, le niveau apparaitra en pourcentage.
Lorsque lappareil est teint, appuyer lgrement sur une des touches entrainera lapparition dun symbole
de pile dans lcran. Une animation dmontrant une pile en train de se remplir pendant que lappareil est en
train dtre charg. Une fois lappareil compltement charg, lanimation sarrte et la pile apparaitra
compltement.

Remarques :
a. A 15% de la puissance rsiduelle de la batterie, vous obtenez un message d'avertissement sur l'cran. Vous devriez maintenant
connecter l'appareil au secteur avec une prise pour charger la batterie afin d'viter d'ventuelles pertes de donnes et augmenter la
dure de vie de la batterie.
b. Vous pouvez utiliser l'appareil pendant le chargement de la batterie. Pour garantir la batterie une longue dure de vie, nous vous
demandons de ne pas utiliser l'appareil.
c. Pour assurer une bonne performance, la batterie intgre doit tre utilise frquemment. Si vous n'utilisez l'appareil que rarement,
veuillez recharger la batterie compltement au moins une fois par mois.
d. Assurez-vous de n'utiliser que l'adaptateur secteur fourni pour le chargement.

6.) Utilisation d'une carte Micro SD / SDHC


Cet appareil peut lire des donnes directement partir d'une carte mmoire Micro SD/SDHC. Pour utiliser
une carte mmoire Micro SD/SDHC, glissez la carte dans l'ouverture situe au bas de l'appareil (I).
Utilisez l'explorateur prinstall (vous trouverez plus d'informations dans le mode d'emploi complet),
pour pouvoir accder aux donnes fournies sur la carte mmoire. Pour cela, choisissez carte SD dans
l'index de l'explorateur.

7.) Transmission de donnes entre l'appareil et un ordinateur


1.) Branchez l'appareil un ordinateur en utilisant le cble USB ci-joint.
2.) L'cran pour la connexion USB saffiche prsent sur lappareil. Tapez brivement sur Activer la
mmoire USB. L'appareil est reconnu comme support de donnes amovible et vous obtenez
l'information mmoire USB en utilisation. Aprs avoir brivement tap sur la touche Accueil,
vous pouvez continuer utiliser votre appareil normalement. Vous avez maintenant accs aux
donnes internes de votre appareil depuis votre ordinateur et vous pouvez copier, supprimer ou
dplacer des donnes sur l'appareil.
3.) Si une connexion USB avec l'ordinateur existe, l'icne USB s'affiche dans la barre d'tat. Vous pouvez
obtenir des informations supplmentaires dans la barre d'tat largie ( cliquez sur sur l'horloge dans la
barre d'tat pour l'ouvrir ) et vous pouvez activer ou dsactiver la connexion USB.

FR - 5

Slectionnez Dsactiver le disque USB pour dsactiver le disque.

Slectionnez la fonction Retirer en toute scurit


priphrique de l'ordinateur.

sur l'ordinateur pour retirer le

Note : Les applications prinstalles et le systme d'exploitation Android prennent une partie de la mmoire interne existante environ 1 Go d'espace est ncessaire. Pour cette raison, toute la mmoire interne n'est pas disponible.

8.) cran tactile


Ce priphrique est actionn via l'cran tactile. Vous pouvez facilement lancer des applications en
appuyant sur l'cran tactile avec vos doigts, saisir des textes sur le clavier virtuel et basculer entre les
diffrents crans principaux en faisant glisser le doitgt dans la direction respective.
Veuillez retirer le film de protection de l'cran avant d'utiliser l'appareil.
L'cran tactile dtecte de petites charges lectriques, comme celles mises par les doigts humains et
dtermine ainsi le point d'entre.
Utilisez alors idalement le bout de vos doigts pour l'entre. L'opration avec un stylo ou d'autres objets
pointus n'est pas possible.
L'cran tactile ne doit pas entrer en contact avec l'eau ou d'autres appareils lectriques afin dviter des
dysfonctionnements et des dfauts durables.
Remarques :
a.
Si l'cran tactile n'est pas exploit pendant deux minutes, l'appareil passe en mode veille. Appuyez brivement sur la touche ON /
OFF pour passer en mode actif.
b.
Pour empcher des entres non autorises, un mode verrouillage est activ automatiquement. Veuillez dverrouiller le mode
verrouillage sur l'cran tactile. Touchez le verrou ferm
sur l'cran et maintenez appuy. Maintenant faites glissez le verrou
vers le verrou ouvert

qui apparat sur l'cran et retirez votre doigt de l'cran. L'cran est maintenant dverrouill.

Vous pouvez faire pivoter l'appareil dans toutes les directions. Il possde un capteur qui dirige l'cran
automatiquement.

FR - 6

9.) L'cran d'accueil


Affichage

Dverrouillage de l'cran
Si l'cran tactile n'est pas utilis pendant deux minutes, l'appareil se met en mode Standby. Appuyez sur
le bouton Marche/Arrt pendant une courte priode pour revenir en mode actif. L'affichage verrouill
empche les saisies involontaires. Touchez le verrou ferm
sur l'cran et maintenez appuy.
Maintenant faites glissez le verrou vers le verrou ouvert
qui apparat sur l'cran et retirez votre doigt
de l'cran. L'cran est maintenant dverrouill.

Dplacer l'icne de verrouillage avec votre doigt dans le sens de la flche.

Conseil : Faites glisser le symbole du verrou vers le symbole d'appareil photo qui apparat pour
ouvrir l'application appareil-photo directement.

FR - 7

Barre d'tat
La barre d'tat se trouve dans la section infrieure de l'cran de dmarrage. Elle a les fonctions
suivantes :
tape de retour

Derniers programmes
utiliss

Appel de l'cran d'accueil

Dure

Indicateur de
batterie

Connexion sans fil

Ici vous recevrez des informations sur :

les derniers programmes utiliss

la force de signal de la connexion WIFI actuelle

l'heure

le niveau de charge actuel de la batterie


Vous pouvez utiliser les fonctions suivantes :

Appelez l'cran de dmarrage


Revenir en arrire vers le dernier le menu utilis
Appelez les derniers programmes utiliss

Vous pouvez ouvrir la barre d'tat largie en tapant lgrement sur l'horloge. L les derniers messages
d'tat sont affichs. Divers accs rapides et par exemple l'accs aux paramtres, sont affichs, si vous tapez
sur l'horloge dans la barre d'tat largie nouveau.

Rglage de l'cran principal


Vous pouvez rgler l'cran principal facilement selon vos besoins particuliers. Si vous souhaitez
supprimer une icne, appuyez sur l'icne avec le doigt pendant une courte priode, puis poussez-la
dans l'icne X affiche. Maintenant, retirez votre doigt de l'cran tactile et l'icne est supprime.
Si vous souhaitez dplacer une icne de l' aperu des applications vers l'cran principal, appuyez sur
l'icne dans l'aperu des applications pendant une courte priode et l'cran principal s'affiche.
Dplacez l'icne vers la position dsire et retirez votre doigt de l'cran tactile. L'icne est dsormais
ajoute l'cran principal. Si vous dplacez une icne sur une autre icne, un dossier contenant les deux
icnes est automatiquement cr. Appuyez sur le dossier pour afficher les icnes contenues puis
slectionner l'icne souhaite en tapant brivement dessuss
Vous pouvez galement ajouter des widgets l'cran principal. Pour ce faire, appuyez sur le bouton
dans le coin en haut droite de l'cran principal et le menu des applications s'ouvrira. Maintenant,
appuyez sur widgets. Tous les widgets disponibles sur le priphrique sont maintenant affichs .
Ajoutez un widget l'cran principal exactement comme vous ajoutez une icne.
Si vous voulez changer votre image de fond, appuyez simplement sur une place libre dans l'cran principal
et continuez appuyer sur l'cran jusqu' ce que le menu de slection d'arrire plan apparaisse. Maintenant,
slectionnez la source de l'image souhaite et procder comme suit.

FR - 8

Utiliser diffrents crans d'accueil


Cinq crans principaux peuvent tre individuellement configurs. Vous pouvez facilement passer de
l'un l'autre en faisant glisser le doigt lgrement sur l'cran vers la gauche ou la droite.

En appuyant sur la touche accueil, vous arrivez toujours revenir l'cran d'accueil central.

Applications prinstalles sur l'cran d'accueil


Diverses applications sont dj prinstalles sur l'cran d'accueil :
-

Barre de recherche pour la recherche Google


Prvisions mto
Browser
Musique
Galerie
E-Mail
Paramtres
AndroidPIT (App Center)

A Lien vers Google search


B Prsentation de l'application
C Prvisions mtorologiques mondiales
D Apps sur l'cran principal
E Barre d'tat : retour, accueil,
programmes rcemment utiliss, heure,
WiFi, tat de la batterie

FR - 9

a) Barre de recherche pour la recherche sur Google

Appuyez sur la loupe pour ouvrir brivement la fonction de recherche Google . Saisissez l'lment de
recherche dsir l'aide du clavier virtuel, puis appuyez sur Envoyer. Tous les rsultats de recherche
disponibles de la recherche Google vont maintenant tre affichs.
Appuyez sur le microphone pour activer la saisie vocale. Vous pouvez maintenant accder l'lment
recherche souhait en parlant distinctement. La reconnaissance vocale offrira ensuite plusieurs
lments de recherche possibles. Confirmez l'lment souhait avec un bref coup et les rsultats de la
recherche de la recherche Google seront affich.

Astuce : Par un mouvement rapide vers le haut ou vers le bas, aprs


lequel vous relchez le doigt de l'cran tactile, l'appareil fait dfiler une liste
rapidement. Cela fonctionne dans tous les affichages qui sont plus
grands que l'cran.

Note : Pour cette fonction, une connexion Internet sans fil est ncessaire.

b) Aperu des applications

Appuyez sur cette icne pour ouvrir l' aperu des applications. L, toutes les applications installes sur le
priphrique seront affiches. Vous pouvez dmarrer n'importe quelle application en appuyant sur l'icne
correspondante.

FR - 10

c) Prvisions mtorologiques
Le widget prvisions mtorologiques vous montre en un coup d'il l'heure, la date, les conditions
mtorologiques et la temprature l'endroit paramtr.
Pour modifier les paramtres, veuillez aller dans laperu des applications et tapez sur l'icne
prvisions mtorologiques. Vous pouvez dsormais effectuer les changements dsirs.

Menu de rglage des prvisions mtorologiques


Note : Pour cette fonction, une connexion Internet sans fil est ncessaire.

d) WIFI
Pour connecter votre appareil lInternet, vous devez avoir une connexion WIFI. Afin de l'activer, touchez
l'icne WIFI sur l'cran de dmarrage, ou ouvrez l'option WIFI dans Paramtres.
Note : Veuillez noter qu'un rseau sans fil doit se trouver porte de votre emplacement actuel.

Connexion automatique
Ouvrez le menu des paramtres WIFI grce l'icne WIFI ou au menu des
paramtres. Vous pouvez y activer ou dsactiver des fonctions WIFI. Pour
dsactiver la fonction WIFI, dplacez le commutateur virtuel vers la gauche. Le
statut devrait passer de activ dsactiv. Pour ractiver l'option WIFI,
dplacez tout simplement le commutateur virtuel vers la droite.

Sur le ct droit des paramtres WIFI, tous les rseaux disponibles ainsi que tous les rseaux dj
utiliss sont affichs.
FR - 11

Veuillez taper sur le rseau dsir et si ncessaire, entrez la cl sans fil approprie (mot de passe) pour
tablir une connexion.

Confirmez le mot de passe saisi, au besoin, en touchant la touche entrer et ensuite slectionnez
Connexion. Aprs un bref instant la connexion sera tablie.
Remarques :
a) Si l'appareil passe en mode veille, la Wi-Fi est automatiquement dsactive. Cela rduit la consommation d'nergie et entrane
donc automatiquement une plus grande autonomie de la batterie. Lorsque l'appareil revient au mode actif, la connexion sans fil est
nouveau tablie automatiquement. Cela peut prendre quelques secondes.
b) La liste des rseaux sans fil reprables est automatiquement mise jour.
c)
Si la fonction sans fil est active, l'appareil se connecte automatiquement un rseau dj configur, condition qu'il soi t
porte.
d) Si un rseau sans fil inconnu se trouve porte, une bote d'information apparat.

Connexion manuelle
Afin de rechercher un rseau WiFi accessible manuellement, procdez comme suit :
(1) Ouvrez les paramtres.
(2) Maintenant, ouvrez les paramtres WiFi et appuyez sur Scan .
(3) Si le rseau WiFi ne figure pas dans la liste des rseaux disponibles alors slectionnez l'option
Ajouter un rseau afin de saisir le SSID du rseau, le protocole de scurit et le mot de passe
possiblement li. Appuyez sur Enregistrer pour confirmer votre saisie.

e) Galerie
Tapez brivement sur l'icne galerie pour obtenir un aperu de tous les albums et images existants.
Slectionnez la galerie souhaite, puis l'image souhaite, en tapant nouveau brivement. L'image
est maintenant affiche en plein cran.

FR - 12

Appuyez sur l'icne photo

pour choisir entre diffrentes options de regroupement.

Pour voir l'image suivante ou prcdente s'afficher, dplacez simplement


l'image actuelle avec votre doigt gauche ou droite de l'cran.

Placez deux doigts sur l'cran tactile et loignez les lun de lautre pour
agrandir l'image en continu. Si vous rassemblez nouveau les doigts,
l'image est rduite en continu. Tapez sur l'cran tactile brivement et
rapidement deux fois, l'image est automatiquement agrandie et est
nouveau affiche dans sa taille originale en appuyant nouveau deux
fois.

En tapant brivement sur l'cran tactile, des fonctions supplmentaires sont disponibles.

Appuyez sur l'icne Menu


pour obtenir des options
supplmentaires. Ici vous pouvez lancer un diaporama, modifier,
tourner, et couper l'image, la dfinir comme image de fond ou
afficher les dtails de l'image.
Appuyez sur l'icne poubelle
slectionne.
Appuyez sur l'icne partager

pour supprimer l'image


pour envoyer l'image, par email.

f) Musique
Tapez brivement sur l'icne Musique sur l'cran d'accueil ou laperu des applications afin d'ouvrir la
lecture de la musique.
Dans l'aperu suivant, vous pouvez choisir d'afficher votre musique trie par artiste, album, titre, liste de
lecture ou la lecture en cours. Pour cela, tapez simplement brivement sur l'icne approprie.
Artistes

Affiche tous les fichiers musicaux tris par artistes.

Albums

Affiche tous les fichiers musicaux tris par albums.

Titre

Affiche tous les fichiers musicaux tris par titres.

Liste de lecture

Affiche les listes de lecture cres.

Lecture en cours

Va directement la lecture en cours.

Slectionnez le fichier voulu en tapant brivement sur le nom et la lecture de la musique commence.

FR - 13

cran de lecture
(1) Lecture en cours
(2) Activer / Dsactiver la lecture alatoire
(3) Options de rptition :
a)
Tous les titres sont rpts
b)
Le titre actuel est rpt
c)
La rptition est dsactive
(4) Dtails des titres
(5) Titre prcdent / suivant
(6) Lecture / Pause
(7) Chronologie

Touchez l'icne Pause pour interrompre la lecture.


Pour reprendre la lecture, tapez sur l'icne lecture .
Tapez sur l'icne Avant ou Arrire
/
pour lire le titre prcdent ou suivant.
Tapez sur un emplacement de la chronologie afin de poursuivre directement la lecture cet endroit.
Appuyez sur les touches de volume +/- sur le ct de l'appareil pour rgler le volume.
Pour ouvrir l'aperu de la liste de lecture actuelle, veuillez taper sur licne de la liste de lecture
. Tapez sur un titre pour lire celui-ci directement.
Pour changer le mode rptition, tapez sur l'icne Mode rptition .
Pour arriver l'cran d'accueil, taper brivement sur la touche Accueil
. Cela n'arrte pas la
lecture de la musique. Par exemple, vous pouvez ainsi surfer avec le navigateur sur Internet tout
en coutant votre musique. Il suffit de taper nouveau sur l'icne Musique pour revenir la
lecture de la musique.

En mode lecture, vous pouvez ajuster d'autres paramtres. Tapez brivement sur la touche

du menu.

Bibliothque - Une liste de tous les fichiers musicaux existants sont affichs.
Mix de soire - Activer ou dsactiver le mode Mix de soire.
Ajouter la liste de lecture - Ajouter le titre en cours de lecture la liste de lecture.
Supprimer - Suppression du titre actuellement en cours de lecture
Effets sonores - Dfinir un effet sonore pour la lecture de la musique.

g) Vido
Tapez brivement sur l'icne Galerie de l'cran d'accueil ou laperu des applications afin d'ouvrir la
lecture de la vido.
A prsent, les fichiers vido s'affichent dans une liste. Slectionnez le fichier souhait en touchant
brivement et la vido dmarre.

FR - 14

h) App Center
Sur l'appareil, l'AndroidPIT App Center est dj install. Vous trouverez ici diverses applications, des
rapports d'essai, un blog et un forum.
Pour de plus amples informations ou une assistance pour utiliser l'App Center, merci de visiter la page
d'accueil du fournisseur l'adresse www.androidpit.de.
Note : Pour cette fonction, une connexion Internet sans fil est ncessaire.

i) Navigateur Web
Pour lancer le navigateur Web, veuilez taper sur l'icne navigateur
de'l'cran d'accueil.
Pour ouvrir une page Web, veuillez taper sur le champ de saisie suprieur pour l'adresse internet. Le
clavier virtuel s'ouvre prsent et vous pouvez entrer l'adresse du site web dsir. Tapez sur Go ou
sur l'icne de flche prs du champ de saisie pour ouvrir la page web.
Note : Tous les rseaux ne fournissent pas un accs Internet. Certains rseaux offrent un accs uniquement d'autres ordinateurs
connects localement et aucune connexion Internet.

Utilisation du clavier virtuel


Tapez sur le champ de saisie pour ouvrir le clavier virtuel. Vous pouvez maintenant saisir du texte ou
appeler des pages Internet.
a. Caps Lock (criture en majuscule et en minuscule)
b. Touche de retour en arrire
c. Appel du menu pour entrer les nombres, caractres
et caractres spciaux
d. Barre d'espace (Entre d'espace)
e. Entre (confirmation de votre entre)

FR - 15

Saisie de caractres spciaux


Pour saisir un caractre spcial tel que , appuyez sur la touche a avec votre doigt pendant une
longue priode pour appeler le menu des caractres spciaux. Maintenant glisser avec votre doigt sur le
caractre spcial souhait, par exemple un et retirez votre doigt de l'cran. Vous avez maintenant saisi
un .

Utilisation du navigateur Web

Vous pouvez faire dfiler l'affichage l'cran en effectuant un mouvement de balayage vertical avec
vos doigts. Veuillez ne pas amorcer le mouvement de balayage sur un lment de menu ou un lien,
sinon l'opration existante serait ouverte.
Pour ouvrir un lien Internet, tapez simplement sur le lien. La nouvelle page s'ouvre
automatiquement.
Appuyez sur la touche menu
pour ouvrir le menu du navigateur Web. L, de multiples fonctions
sont fournies. Parmi d'autres choses pouvez actualiser le site Web ouvert ici, multiples Webs.
Pour revenir la page prcdente, veuillez appuyer sur la touche retour
.
Pour aller directement l'cran d'accueil, veuillez appuyez sur la touche Accueil
.
Pour entrer du texte, tapez sur le champ appropri et utilisez le clavier virtuel pour saisir du texte.

Note : Pour cette fonction, une connexion Internet sans fil est ncessaire.

FR - 16

j) Aperu des applications


Tapez brivement sur l'icne Aperu des applications pour ouvrir laperu des applications. Vous
voyez maintenant un aperu de toutes les applications pr-installes et des applications que vous avez
dj installes. Ouvrez l'application souhaite en tapant brivement sur l'icne correspondante.

Aperu des applications

k) Paramtres systme
Appuyez sur l'icne des paramtres dans le menu des applications pour appeler les paramtres
systme.

Vous pouvez trouver les diffrentes catgories sur le ct gauche du menu. Les options de
configuration disponibles sont affiches en appuyant brivement sur chaque option de menu
slectionne. Notez que toutes les fonctions offertes par Android ne sont peut-tre pas
compatibles avec l'appareil.
Lorsque vous avez rgl tous les paramtres vous pouvez revenir au menu prcdent avec la touche
Retour

, ou passer l'cran principal directement avec la touche Accueil

automatiquement enregistres.

FR - 17

. Vos saisies seront

Aperu des paramtres

WiFi & Rseaux

WiFi

Ici vous pouvez rgler les paramtres WiFi.

Plus

Ici vous pouvez rgler des paramtres rseau supplmentaires.


Spcifiez le volume dsir et le son pour les messages ici. Vous pouvez
aussi activer ou dsactiver un son de confirmation lorsque vous touchez
l'cran et un son indicatif lors du dverrouillage de la serrure d'affichage.

Sons

Affchage

Luminosit Rgler la luminosit de l'cran.


Fond d'cran Slection du fond d'cran.
Rotation d'cran autom Activation ou la dsactivation de l'alignement
automatique de l'affichage lors de la rotation l'appareil.
Mode veille state Rglez le dlai avant la dsactivation automatique de
l'affichage.
Taille de la police configuration de la taille de police souhaite.

Priphrique

Utilisateur

Systme

Mmoire

Ici, vous pouvez obtenir des informations sur la mmoire interne et - si elle
est insre - sur votre carte MicroSD. Vous pouvez aussi supprimer le
contenu de la mmoire.

Batterie

Ici, vous pouvez obtenir des informations sur l'tat de charge des batteries
intgres..

Apps

ci vous pouvez grer les applications installes et d'obtenir des


renseignements leur sujet.

Comptes &
synchronisation

Ici vous pouvez dterminer si et quelle frquence les comptes crs par
vous seront synchroniss.

Localisation de
services

Ici, vous pouvez autoriser plusieurs applications Android pour dterminer


et utilisez la position actuelle via les rseaux WiFi (par exemple Google Maps
). Vous pouvez galement dterminer si Google peut adapter les
rsultats de recherche et d'autres services votre position.

Scurit

Ici vous pouvez mettre en place un verrouillage de l'cran, par exemple, ou


la mise en uvre d'autres paramtres de scurit.

Langue & Clavier

Ici vous pouvez dfinir votre langue prfre, par exemple, ou ajouter des
mots diffrents votre dictionnaire personnel ou rgler le clavier.

Enregistrer &
rinitialiser

Ici, vous pouvez enregistrer vos paramtres systme et donnes


d'application sur les serveurs Google. De plus vous pouvez rinitialiser les
rglages par dfaut. ATTENTION : Ce faisant, toutes les donnes
sauvegardes sur le priphrique seront supprimes.

Date & heure

Ici vous pouvez dfinir la date, l'heure, le fuseau horaire et le format


d'affichage.

A propos de la
tablette

Affiche des informations supplmentaires sur le priphrique.

FR - 18

10.) Expdition / rception des e-mails


Une application de messagerie lectronique est prinstalle sur cet appareil. Vous pouvez ainsi utiliser
votre adresse e-mail existante pour envoyer et recevoir des e-mails.
Note : Pour cette fonction, une connexion internet sans fil est ncessaire.

Ouvrez l'application par l'intermdiaire de l'icne E-mail que vous trouvez dans le menu des
applications.

Configuration de votre bote aux lettres lectronique


(1) Dmarrez l'application e-mail en tapant sur l'icne e-mail. Vous tes maintenant invit mettre en
place votre bote aux lettres lectroniques.
(2) Entrez votre adresse e-mail et votre mot de passe associ, puis tapez sur Suivant. Ensuite,
renommez votre compte et dfinissez votre nom affich pour les messages sortants. Tapez sur
Termin pour terminer l'installation. Votre bote aux lettres lectronique est slectionne comme
bote par dfaut si vous slectionnez l'option Envoyer des e-mails de ce compte par dfaut.
(3) Vous pouvez galement configurer votre bote aux lettres lectronique manuellement. Entrez votre
adresse e-mail et votre mot de passe associ, puis tapez sur Configuration manuelle pour saisir
les informations du serveur e-mail.
(4) Choisissez parmi les types de serveurs POP3, IMAP ou Exchange pour e-mails entrants.
Note : Si vous ne savez pas quels paramtres que vous devez effectuer, veuillez contacter votre fournisseur de messagerie
lectronique, votre administrateur rseau ou recherchez sur internet des termes tels que adresse POP et nom de votre
fournisseur selon les informations requises.

(5) Entrez les informations requises (serveur, port, etc.)


(6) Slectionnez le type de serveur pour les e-mails sortants et entrez les informations requises.
(7) Tapez sur Suivant pour poursuivre dans le menu. L'application e-mail vrifie prsent les
modifications apportes la configuration du serveur. Aprs avoir russi crer un dossier, vous
voyez le message Votre compte est cr, et l'e-mail est en cours de cration. Votre compte est
maintenant mis en place.
(8) Entrez un nom pour votre bote aux lettres, puis tapez sur Termin pour terminer le processus.
Note : Si vous deviez possder plus d'un compte e-mail, le compte par dfaut est appel lors de chaque dmarrage de l'application email.

FR - 19

Grer les comptes d'emails


Ajouter une nouvelle bote de rception:
(1) Ouvrez l'application email et appuyez sur la touche menu
pour afficher des options
supplmentaires. Slectionnez l'option de menu Paramtres puis Ajouter un compte pour crer
une nouvelle bote aux lettres.
(2) Suivez les instructions de l'Assistant Installation pour crer une nouvelle bote aux lettres

Supprimer une bote de rception:


(1) Ouvrez l'application email et appuyez sur la touche menu
pour afficher des options
supplmentaires. Slectionnez l'option de menu Paramtres puis Supprimer un compte pour
supprimer une la bote aux lettres dsire.

Vrifier les proprits du compte:


(1) Ouvrez l'application email et appuyez sur la touche menu
pour afficher des options
supplmentaires, puis slectionnez Paramtres . Toutes les botes aux lettres dj cres
s'affichent alors sur le ct gauche du menu.
(2) Appuyez sur la bote aux lettres souhaite pour afficher les paramtres du compte
(3) Appuyez sur Paramtres du Compte que vous souhaitez modifier dans le but de faire les saisies
souhaites.

Affichage des e-mails


Ouvrez l'application e-mail en tapant brivement sur l'icne e-mail. Votre bote aux lettres dj cre
s'affiche prsent.
Par un mouvement de balayage vertical, vous pouvez faire dfiler vos e-mails.
Tapez brivement sur un e-mail spcifique pour ouvrir celui-ci.
Tapez et maintenez votre doigt sur un e-mail particulier afin d'afficher plus d'options. Un champ
d'information apparat prsent. Vous pouvez maintenant ouvrir l'e-mail, y rpondre, le transfrer
ou le supprimer.

Ecrire des messages d'email


(1) Appuyez sur l'icne email dans la barre de menu en haut de l'aperu email et une nouvelle fentre
s'ouvre, o vous pouvez crire un nouveau message.
(2) Saisissez l'adresse lectronique du destinataire, une ligne d'objet et le texte dans les champs
dsigns. Vous pouvez galement ajouter Cc / Cci pour envoyer cet e-mail plusieurs utilisateurs.
(3) Appuyez sur `Envoyer 'pour envoyer l'email. Appuyez sur Enregistrer pour sauvegarder l'email
saisi en tant que brouillon. Lorsque vous appuyez sur l'icne poubelle , l'email actuellement saisi
sera supprim.
FR - 20

11.) Gestion des applications


Applications prinstalles
Cet appareil est livr avec des applications dj prinstalles. Vous trouverez un aperu des
applications dj installes dans l'aperu des applications . Il s'agit notamment du lecteur vido, du
lecteur audio, du navigateur Internet, de l'alarme, de la calculatrice et encore un peu plus. Pour ouvrir
une de ces applications, tapez brivement sur l'icne correspondante.

Installation des applications

Pour installer des applications sur l'appareil, veuillez effectuez les oprations suivantes

(1) Tlcharger le logiciel (par exemple, partir du March Androidpit). Assurez-vous qu'il s'agisse d'un
fichier APK.
(2) Si vous deviez avoir tlcharg les fichiers sur votre ordinateur, connectez l'appareil votre
ordinateur via le cble USB et copiez les fichiers sur la mmoire interne.
(3) Dbranchez l'appareil de l'ordinateur et ouvrez l'Explorateur pour ouvrir les fichiers copis.
(4) Suivez les instructions d'installation qui apparaissent l'cran pour installer l'application.
(5) Aprs la russite de l'installation, vous trouvez la nouvelle application dans le menu Application.

Dsinstallation des applications

(1) Ouvrez les paramtres systme en appuyant sur l'icne des paramtres dans l'aperu d'application.
(2) Maintenant, appuyez sur l'option de menu Apps brivement pour accder aux paramtres
d'applications.
(3) Choisissez l'aperu d'applications souhait dans les options de menu Tlcharger, mmoire USB,
active et tous en tapant brivement dessus.
(4) Maintenant, slectionnez l'application que vous souhaitez dsinstaller en tapant brivement dessus.
(5) Maintenant, appuyez sur Dsinstallez et validez votre entre avec OK pour dsinstaller
l'application du priphrique.

Note : Vous ne pouvez pas supprimer les logiciels prinstalls.

FR - 21

12.) Gestionnaire de donnes


Ouvrez laperu des applications et appuyez sur licne du gestionnaire de donnes afin dmarrer le
gestionnaire de donnes.

Naviguer travers les fichiers et dossiers


Vous pouvez ici accder la mmoire interne, la carte mmoire (sil y en a une dinsre dans
le tablet), au USB (sil est reli au tablet), ainsi qu tous les fichiers images ou vidos disponibles.
Appuyez sur le lemplacement de sauvegarde souhait afin dafficher la liste des donnes qui y
sont contenues, ou encore slectionnez licne des fichiers images ou vidos afin dafficher
toutes les donnes de ce type.
En faisant glisser votre doigt verticalement sur lcran, vous pouvez faire dfiler vos fichiers et
dossiers. Ouvrez vos donnes ou dossiers en appuyant lgrement dessus.

Vous pouvez galement revenir au menu prcdent

en appuyant lgrement sur licne

correspondante.

Utiliser la barre doutils

Revenir au dossier parent.

Mmoire interne

Carte Micro SD (si vous en avez insr une dans le tablet)

Mmoire USB (si vous en avez branch un au tablet)

Affiche toutes les images disponibles

Affiche tous les vidos disponibles

Affiche tous les processus en cours

diteur : ici, vous pouvez insrer (coller) des donnes, les


supprimer, en faire une copie ou les dplacer. Appuyez sur le
fichier souhait pour voir apparatre une flche verte devant
son nom. Slectionnez enfin la fonction souhaite.
FR - 22

Copier, dplacer et renommer des fichiers ou dossiers


1.)
2.)
3.)
4.)

5.)

6.)

Naviguez jusquau fichier souhait dans laperu des donnes.


Slectionnez et gardez le doigt sur le fichier jusqu ce quune bote dinformation apparaisse.
Slectionnez alors la fonction souhaite. Vous avez le choix entre supprimer le fichier (Delete
file), renommer le fichier, copier le fichier ou encore dplacer le fichier (Move file).
Pour copier ou dplacer, appuyez lgrement sur licne correspondante (Copy/move) et
naviguez jusquau dossier darrive. Appuyez finalement sur licne ddition
(copy/move) et slectionnez coller afin dinsrer le fichier.
Pour supprimer le fichier, slectionnez supprimer et, par mesure de scurit, confirmez
votre slection en appuyant une deuxime fois sur supprimer . Pour interrompre, appuyez
lgrement sur annuler .
Pour renommer un fichier, appuyez sur renommer le fichier et entrez finalement le
nouveau nom de fichier au moyen du clavier virtuel. Confirmez votre entre avec
renommer ou annulez le processus avec annuler .

13.) Lecture de documents Office


L'application Suite Office est dj prinstalle sur cet appareil pour la lecture de documents Office.
Vous pouvez lire des fichiers Word, Excel, PowerPoint.
1.)
2.)
3.)
4.)

Copiez les fichiers Office dsirs sur l'appareil.


Ouvrez l'application Suite Office.
Naviguez l'aide de l'explorateur vers le fichier dsir.
Slectionnez le fichier dsir en tapant brivement et balayez avec le doigt verticalement ou
horizontalement surl'cran pour faire dfiler les pages. Tapez brivement sur la touche
Menu pour ouvrir davantage d'options. Vous pouvez, par exemple rechercher un texte en
particulier ou compter des mots.

FR - 23

14.) Gestionnaire des tches


Cet appareil est capable de multitche. Ainsi, vous pouvez ouvrir dans le mme temps plusieurs
applications simultanment. Par exemple, vous pouvez couter de la musique et dans le mme temps
surfer sur Internet ou visualiser des images.
Il peut arriver ventuellement qu'un nombre d'applications trop important fonctionne simultanment en
arrire-plan. Dans ce cas, veuillez ouvrir l'application Task Killer et mettez fin aux applications dont
vous n'avez pas besoin en ce moment.

(1)

Ouvrez l'application Task Killer.

(2)

Slectionnez les applications dont


vous n'avez besoin actuellement.

(3)

Pour confirmer votre slection, veuillez taper brivement sur l'icne Kill
selected apps.

15.) Conditions de garantie limite


La garantie couvre uniquement le remplacement de ce produit Intenso. La garantie ne couvre pas l'usure
normale rsultant d'une mauvaise, dune inapproprie, d'une ngligence, d'un accident, dune
incompatibilit ou d'une mauvaise performance d'un matriel informatique ou de logiciels informatiques
dfinis.
Il n'y a aucun bnfice de la garantie en cas de non-respect du manuel utilisateur Intenso ainsi qu'en cas de
mauvaise installation, utilisation, ou en cas de dfauts causs par d'autres quipements.
Si l'appareil est expos des vibrations, des dcharges lectrostatiques, aux effets de la chaleur ou de
l'humidit au-del des spcifications du produit, il n'est plus garanti.
Intenso n'est pas responsable des pertes de donnes ou de la survenue de tout autre dommage collatral
ou dommage conscutif, de la violation des conditions de garantie ou de tout autre dommage, quelle qu'en
soit la cause sous-jacente.
Ce produit n'est pas destin un usage commercial ni des applications mdicales et spciales dans
laquelle la dfaillance du produit peut entraner des blessures, la mort ou des dommages matriels
considrables.
FR - 24

16.) Donnes techniques

CPU
Mmoire principale
Systme d'exploitation
Systmes d'exploitation
compatibles
Options de connexion
Sans fil
G-Sensor
Format photo
Format audio
Format vido
Affichage
Camra
SNR
Gamme de frquence
Alimentation
Batterie interne

1 GHz Cortex A8
512 MB de DDR 3
Android 4.0.4
Windows XP / Vista / 7 / Linux 2.4 et ultrieur / Mac 10.6 et suprieur
Casque, Micro SD (SDHC), Micro USB
WiFi (802.11 b / g / n)
Rotation de 360 degrs
JPEG, BMP, GIF, PNG
MP3, WMA, WAV, OGG, FLAC, APE
MPEG1, MPEG 4, FLV
cran LCD TFT, 800 x 480 pixels
Camra frontale 0,3 MP
> = 80 dB
20 Hz - 20 KHz
(V) Adaptateur AC (Ktec KSAS0100500200HE) : Entre AC 100-240V ~
50/60Hz, sortie DC 5V / 2A
Batterie lithium ion et polymre rechargeable

17.) Entretien de l'appareil


Ne pulvrisez ou n'appliquez jamais un liquide directement sur l'cran ou le
botier.

18.) Entretien de l'appareil


Essuyez dlicatement le botier, le cad re et l'cran avec un chiffon doux, non
pelucheux et sans produit chimique. N'utiliser que des dtergents spcialement
conus pour les crans.

19.) limination des vieux quipements lectroniques


Les quipements marqus avec ce symbole sont soumis la directive
europenne 2002/96/EC.
Tous les appareils lectriques et les dchets d'quipement
lectroniques et lectriques doivent tre limins sparment des
ordures mnagres en utilisant les lieux prvus par l'tat cet effet.
viter d'endommager l'environnement en liminant les vieux
quipements lectroniques.

FR - 25

20.) Licence information


Notice of GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE and LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENCE
Dear Customer,
If interested, you and any third party can download the source code of used GPL / LGPL from Intenso
Webpage http://www.intenso.de . The source code of the desired product is available to anyone on the
selection of valid product category and the desired device. In the product details you will find the entry
"drivers". Open this menu to download the corresponding GPL / LGPL code. For a fee of 35 (delivery to
another country as Germany), it is also possible to obtain this code by postal delivery. More information
about the GPL/LGPL-Licence can you nd on following website www.gnu.org
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast,
the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software-to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free
Software Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other
Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Lesser General Public License instead.) You can
apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are
designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this
service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the
software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you
to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of
the software, or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the
recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code.
And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives
you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.
Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is
no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its
recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not
reflect on the original authors' reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that
redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program
proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use
or not licensed at all.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder
saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below, refers to
any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" means either the Program or any derivative
work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or
with modifications and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without
limitation in the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you".
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside
its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if
its contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made by running the
Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any
FR - 26

medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright
notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of
any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty
protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the
Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided
that you also meet all of these conditions:
a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the
date of any change.
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from
the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of
this License.
c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when started
running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an
appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a
warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the user how to
view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an
announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not
derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as
separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the
Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other
licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you;
rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on
the Program.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work
based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under
the scope of this License.
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or
executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed
under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge no
more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the
corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium
customarily used for software interchange; or,
c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code.
(This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object
code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an
executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the
executable. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is
normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on)
of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the
executable.
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then
offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source
code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this
License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will
automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights,
from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full
compliance.
5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants
you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by
FR - 27

law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based
on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for
copying, distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it.
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatically
receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms
and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted
herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License.
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not
limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise)
that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If
you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other
pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a
patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies
directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance
of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to
contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free
software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made
generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent
application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software
through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this
License.
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by
copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an
explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in
or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in
the body of this License.
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public License
from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this
License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions
either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does
not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free
Software Foundation.
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are
different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software
Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will
be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of
promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE
PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE
STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE
PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE,
YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY
COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE
PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL,
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO
USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED
INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE
PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER
FR - 28

PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.


END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way
to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source
file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the "copyright"
line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
one line to give the program's name and an idea of what it does.
Copyright (C) yyyy name of author
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
GNU General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode:
Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author
Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details
type `show w'. This is free software, and you are welcome
to redistribute it under certain conditions; type `show c'
for details.
The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate parts of the General Public
License. Of course, the commands you use may be called something other than `show w' and `show c'; they
could even be mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a "copyright
disclaimer" for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright
interest in the program `Gnomovision'
(which makes passes at compilers) written
by James Hacker.
signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1989
Ty Coon, President of Vice

FR - 29

Intenso GmbH
Date : 12 juillet 2013
Dclaration de conformit CE
Nous, Intenso GmbH,
avec sige Diepholzer Str. 15 49377 Vechta, Allemagne
dclarons sous notre responsabilit que le produit :
Modle : 7 TAB 714 (n article 5509852)
Description : ordinateur tablette
est conforme aux directives et normes suivantes :
directive R&TTE 1999/5/CE
EN 301 489-1 V1.9.2
EN 301 489-17 V2.1.1
EN 300 328 V1.7.1 : 2006-10

EN 55022:2010 (Class B)

EN 55024:2010
EN 61000-3-2:2006+A1 :2009+A2 :2009 (Class D)
EN 61000-3-3:2008

directive basse tension 2006/95/CE


EN 60950-1:2006+A11:2009+A1:2010+A12:2011+A12:correction 2012
directive conception cologique 2009/125/CE
1275/2008
278/2009
directive ROHS 2011/65/EU
Les documents techniques faisant rfrence l'appareil cit en haut sont dposs
l'endroit suivant :
Intenso GmbH
Diepholzer Str. 15, 49377 Vechta, Allemagne
Personne autorise :

____________________________
Directeur gnral : Thomas Phlking

FR - 30

Manual de instrucciones TAB 714


Muchas gracias por haberse decidido por el TAB714. Por favor siga las instrucciones de este manual
para estar informado sobre las funciones ms importantes de este dispositivo.

1.) ndice
1.) ndice ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1
2.) Avisos .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2
3.) Vista general del aparato ....................................................................................................................................................................... 4
4.) Contenido del paquete........................................................................................................................................................................... 4
5.) Carga de la batera ................................................................................................................................................................................ 5
6.) Empleo de la tarjeta Micro SD/SDHC .................................................................................................................................................... 5
7.) Transferencia de datos entre el aparato y un ordenador ....................................................................................................................... 5
8.) Pantalla tctil ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 6
9.) Pantalla inicial ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 7
Visualizacin ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 7
Desbloqueo de la pantalla .......................................................................................................................................................................... 7
Barra de estado .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 8
Adaptacin de la pantalla de inicio ............................................................................................................................................................. 8
Empleo de diversas pantallas iniciales ....................................................................................................................................................... 9
Aplicaciones preinstaladas en la pantalla inicial ......................................................................................................................................... 9
a) Barra de bsqueda para la bsqueda en Google.............................................................................................................................. 10
b) Resumen de las aplicaciones ............................................................................................................................................................... 10
c) Previsin del tiempo.............................................................................................................................................................................. 11
d) WIFI ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 11
Conexin automtica ................................................................................................................................................................................ 11
Conexin manual ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 12
e) Galera .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 12
f) Msica ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 13
g) Vdeo .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 14
h) App Center ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 15
i) Web Browser ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 15
Utilizacin del teclado virtual ..................................................................................................................................................................... 15
Insercin de smbolos ............................................................................................................................................................................... 15
Empleo del Web Browsers........................................................................................................................................................................ 16
j) Resumen de las aplicaciones ................................................................................................................................................................ 16
k) Configuraciones del sistema ................................................................................................................................................................. 16
Resumen de las configuraciones .............................................................................................................................................................. 17
10.) Enviar / recibir e-mails ....................................................................................................................................................................... 18
Instalar su cuenta de email ....................................................................................................................................................................... 18
Administracin de una cuenta de correo electrnico ................................................................................................................................ 19
Agregar un buzn de correo nuevo: ......................................................................................................................................................... 19
Borrar un buzn de correo: ....................................................................................................................................................................... 19
Comprobacin de las propiedades de las cuentas: .................................................................................................................................. 19
Verificar las propiedades de cuenta: ......................................................................................................................................................... 19
Ver mensajes de email ............................................................................................................................................................................. 19
Escribir mensajes de correo electrnico ................................................................................................................................................... 20
11.) Gestin de aplicaciones..................................................................................................................................................................... 20
Instalacin de las aplicaciones ................................................................................................................................................................. 20
Desinstalacin de aplicaciones ................................................................................................................................................................. 20
12.) Administrador de archivos ................................................................................................................................................................. 21
Navegar a travs de archivos y carpetas .................................................................................................................................................. 21
Usar la barra de herramientas .................................................................................................................................................................. 21
Copiar, mover y renombrar archivos y carpetas ....................................................................................................................................... 22
13.) Leer documentos de Office................................................................................................................................................................ 22
14.) Administrador de tareas..................................................................................................................................................................... 23
15.) Condiciones de garanta limitada....................................................................................................................................................... 23
16.) Datos tcnicos ................................................................................................................................................................................... 24
17.) Manutencin del aparato ................................................................................................................................................................... 24
18.) Limpieza del aparato ......................................................................................................................................................................... 24
19.) Eliminacin de aparatos electrnicos fuera de uso ........................................................................................................................... 24
20.) La licencia informacin ...................................................................................................................................................................... 25
Declaracin de conformidad CE ............................................................................................................................................................... 29

ES - 1

Es posible que este manual no contenga todas las funciones de su aparato. Para hacer uso de aplicaciones que provienen
de operadores terceros, le rogamos que contacte a su operador. Tenga en cuenta que cualquier especificacin puede ser
modificada sin previo aviso. Si desea conocer informaciones actuales, consulte la pgina www.intenso.de
Marca
Google, Google-Logo y Android son marcas de Google. Todos los dems nombres de productos o servicios son
propiedad de sus dueos respectivos.

2.) Avisos

Evite un impacto brusco del aparato. No coloque el aparato en superficies inclinadas para evitar
su cada.

No haga uso del aparato en lugares extremadamente fros, calientes, hmedos o repletos de
polvo. Evite tambin la exposicin directa al sol del aparato.

Evite su utilizacin en lugares arenosos.

No emplee el aparato en las proximidades de lugares con riesgo de explosin, como puede ser
el surtidor de una gasolinera.

Evite su empleo en cojines, sofs u otros objetos que fomenten la creacin de calor, pues
existe el riesgo de sobrecalentamiento del aparato.

Guarde sus datos de forma regular para evitar una posible prdida de datos. No nos hacemos
responsables en el caso de una eventual prdida de datos.

No separe la conexin mientras transfiere datos o cuando se va a formatear el aparato. Esta


separacin puede conllevar una prdida de datos.

Imgenes y videos pueden estar protegidos por los derechos de terceras personas. La
reproduccin sin licencia puede violar los derechos de autor.

Evite el empleo del aparato en campos altamente magnetizados.

Proteja a su aparato de la humedad. Si entra humedad en el aparato, apguelo inmediatamente


y dispngase a limpiarlo y secarlo.

No emplee soluciones qumicas a la hora de limpiar el aparato. Utilice simplemente un pao


seco para limpiarlo.
No coloque llamas abiertas, como pueden ser velas encendidas, cerca o sobre el aparato.

No nos hacemos responsables de daos producidos a causa de un funcionamiento incorrecto,


prdida de datos, manejo incorrecto, y propia reparacin del aparato o cambio de batera.

En el caso de que el aparato no reaccione a sus entradas, le rogamos que emplee el botn de
reset que se encuentra en el reverso del aparato para que pueda reiniciarse.

Cuando no lo vaya a utilizar, retire el transformador de la fuente de energa.

El enchufe ha de encontrarse cerca del aparato y ser de fcil acceso

Haga uso del transformador solo en tomas de tierra con AC 100-240V~, 50/60 Hz. En caso de
no tener la certeza de que la fuente de energa local sea segura, consulte al distribuidor de
energa respectivo.
ES - 2

Emplee nicamente el transformador y el cable de conexin a la red ha recibido con este


aparato.

Para interrumpir el abastecimiento de energa de su aparato, retire la fuente de alimentacin de


la corriente. Sujete con cuidado el transformador en el momento de retirarlo del enchufe. No
apriete nunca el cable.

Nunca abra la caja del adaptador de red. En caso de apertura de la caja se corre peligro de
vida debido al choque elctrico. No contiene piezas que requieran manutencin.

En caso de no utilizar el aparato durante un periodo prolongado, la batera comienza a


descargarse lentamente. Antes de volver a utilizar el aparato, debe recargarla.

Le rogamos que elimine el aparato o la batera de manera ecolgica.

Por favor no desmonte los componentes del aparato ni intente repararlo por s mismo, pues en
ese caso la garanta expira.

No emplee el aparato en lugares en que la utilizacin de aparatos mviles se encuentre


prohibida. No utilice el aparato cerca de otros aparatos elctricos, ya que puede ocasionar
interferencias debido a las seales de alta frecuencia.

No utilice el aparato cerca de un marcapasos, en un hospital o prximo a aparatos mdicos,


pues puede causar interferencias debido a las seales de alta frecuencia. Mantenga una
distancia mnima de 15 cm respecto a la posicin de un marcapasos. Consulte al productor de
ese aparato en concreto para obtener informacin sobre su empleo comn.

La utilizacin de auriculares con un volumen alto puede causar daos permanentes a su odo.

Por motivos de seguridad vial, este aparato no debe ser usado por el conductor durante
cualquier trayecto.

ES - 3

3.) Vista general del aparato

1.)

1.)Botn on / off: mantenga el botn


pulsado para apagar el aparato; apriete
el botn brevemente para cambiar de
Standby o botn de guardia a Modo
Activo

5.)Ranura para la tarjeta micro SD

2.)

2.)Conector de auricular de 3.5mm

8.)Cmara frontal

3.)

3.)Casquillo micro USB

4.)

4.)Entrada DC 5V 2A

6.)Volumen +/7.)Touchscreen

4.) Contenido del paquete


Por favor verifique que el contenido del paquete est completo:

TAB 714
Auricular estreo
Cable de USB
Transformador 5V 2.0A
Manual de instrucciones
USB Dongle

ES - 4

5.) Carga de la batera


Por favor cargue completamente la batera del aparato antes de su primera utilizacin. Conecte el
transformador dado al aparato y a un enchufe. Una carga completa dura 5 horas aproximadamente.
Durante el funcionamiento el nivel de la batera es indicado en la barra de estado. Con el bloqueo de
pantalla activado se indica el estado de carga en porcentaje.
En estado apagado se indica un smbolo de batera al pulsar brevemente cualquiera de las teclas. Durante
la carga se muestra una animacin del llenado de la batera en varios niveles. Si la batera est
completamente cargada, termina la animacin y el smbolo de batera aparece completo.

Indicaciones:
a. Cuando a la batera le quede menos del 15% de carga, aparecer en la pantalla un mensaje de advertencia. Entonces debe
conectar el aparato a un enchufe empleando el transformador para proceder a la recarga de la batera, con el fin de evitar la
prdida de datos y aumentar la duracin de la batera.
b. Puede utilizar el aparato mientras la batera se recarga. Sin embargo, para asegurar la larga duracin de la batera, le rogamos que
no haga uso del aparato mientras la batera est cargando.
c. Para asegurar el buen funcionamiento del aparato, la batera integrada debe ser utilizada de forma habitual. Si no emplea el
aparato habitualmente, recargue la batera completamente al menos una vez al mes.
d. Asegrese de que solo emplea el transformador incluido en el paquete para recargar la batera.

6.) Empleo de la tarjeta Micro SD/SDHC


Para utilizar una tarjeta micro SD/SDHC, conecte la tarjeta en la ranura correspondiente en la parte
inferior del dispositivo (I). Utilice el Explorador preinstalado (para ms informacin consulte las
instrucciones detalladas) para acceder a los datos existentes en la tarjeta de memoria. Seleccione en el
Explorador el directorio de "Tarjeta SD".

7.) Transferencia de datos entre el aparato y un ordenador


1.) Conecte el aparato al ordenador con ayuda del cable de USB que se le proporciona.
2.) En el aparato se muestra ahora la pantalla con la conexin USB. Pulse brevemente la tecla de
activacin de la memoria de USB. El aparato se reconocer como soporte de datos mviles y usted
recibir la informacin de la memoria de USB en funcionamiento. Tras pulsar brevemente la tecla
Home, puede volver a utilizar el aparato de forma normal. Desde su ordenador tiene ahora acceso a la
memoria interna del aparato y puede copiar, eliminar o mover datos del aparato.
3.) Si existe una conexin USB con el ordenador, le aparecer un smbolo de USB en la barra de estado.
En la barra de estado ampliada obtendr informacin adicional y podr activar o desactivar la conexin
USB (pulse brevemente en el reloj de la barra de estado para abrirla).

ES - 5

Para desactivar la memoria, elija desactivar memoria USB.

Elija en el ordenador la funcin Retirar de forma segura


ordenador.

para separar el dispositivo del

Nota: las aplicaciones instaladas en el sistema operativo Android ocupan una parte de la memoria interna dada aproximadamente
se requiere 1 GB de espacio de memoria. Por este motivo no se encuentra la totalidad de la memoria interna a su disposicin.

8.) Pantalla tctil


Este dispositivo se maneja mediante una pantalla tctil. Puede iniciar aplicaciones, introducir textos con
el teclado virtual, pulsando brevemente en la pantalla tctil y cambiar entre las diversas pantallas de
inicio deslizndolas hacia la direccin deseada.
Por favor retire la pelcula protectora de la pantalla antes de utilizar el aparato.
La pantalla tctil identifica pequeas cargas elctricas, tales como las emitidas por los dedos de la mano,
definindose as como punto de entrada. Por consiguiente, es preferible que utilice las puntas de sus
dedos para efectuar las entradas. Su empleo por medio de un bolgrafo o de otro objeto agudo no es
posible.
La pantalla tctil no ha de entrar en contacto con agua u otros equipamientos elctricos para evitar un
mal funcionamiento del aparato o defectos permanentes.
Advertencias:
a.
Si la pantalla tctil no se usa durante dos minutos, el aparato pasa a encontrarse en modo Standby. Pulsen brevemente la tecla
On/Off para cambiar al modo activo.
b.
El bloqueo del teclado se encuentra activado automticamente con el fin de evitar entradas no deseadas. Por favor desbloquee el
teclado de la pantalla tctil. Toque el candado cerrado
el candado para que aparezca un candado abierto

en la pantalla y mantngalo presionado. A continuacin presione sobre


y quite el dedo de la pantalla. La pantalla est desbloqueada ahora.

El aparato puede girar en todas las direcciones, pues dispone de un sensor que ajusta la pantalla
automticamente.

ES - 6

9.) Pantalla inicial


Visualizacin

Desbloqueo de la pantalla
Si no utiliza la pantalla tctil durante ms de dos minutos, el dispositivo cambio a modo Standby.
Presione brevemente el botn On/Off para activarlo. La pantalla est protegida para evitar entradas no
deseadas. Toque el candado cerrado
en la pantalla y mantngalo presionado. A continuacin
presione sobre el candado para que aparezca un candado abierto
y quite el dedo de la pantalla. La
pantalla est desbloqueada ahora

Mueva el smbolo de cerradura con sus dedos en la direccin que indica la flecha

Nota: apriete el icono del candado para que aparezca el icono de la cmara para ir directamente a la
aplicacin.

ES - 7

Barra de estado
La barra de estado se encuentra en la parte inferior de la pantalla de inicio.Tiene las siguientes
funciones:
Volver atrs

ltimos programas
utilizados

Acceso a la pantalla
inicial

Hora

Estado de la batera

Conexin WLAN

Puede comprobar la siguiente informacin sobre:

los ltimos programas utilizados


la intensidad de la seal de la conecxin WLAN actual
la hora actual
el estado de carga de la batera actual

Puede ejecutar las siguientes funciones:

arrancar la pantalla de inicio


volver al paso anterior en los respectivos mens arrancados
arrancar el ltimo programa utilizado

Pulsando brevemente en el reloj abrir la barra de estado ampliada. Aqu puede ver las notificaciones
de estado actuales. Pulsando de nuevo en el reloj en la barra de estado ampliada se le mostrarn los
accesos rpidos, como por ejemplo el acceso a las configuraciones.
Adaptacin de la pantalla de inicio
Puede adaptar su pantalla de inicio de forma muy simple a sus necesidades individuales. Si desea
borrar un icono, mantenga pulsado con el dedo el icono y arrstrelo hacia smbolo X que se muestra.
Ahora retire el dedo de la pantalla tctil y el icono ser borrado.
Si desea posicionar un icono de la vista general de aplicaciones en la pantalla de inicio, mantenga
pulsado el icono en la vista general de aplicaciones y aparecer la pantalla de inicio. Arrastre el icono
hacia el lugar deseado y retire el dedo de la pantalla tctil. El icono le ha sido aadido de esta forma a
la pantalla de inicio. Si posiciona un icono encima del otro, automticamente se crea una carpeta con ambos
iconos. Pulse en la carpeta para ver todos los iconos guardados en ella y elija el icono deseado pulsando
brevemente sobre l.
Tambin puede aadir Widgets a su pantalla de inicio. Para ello, pulse la tecla
en la esquina
superior derecha de la pantalla de inicio, para abrir el men de aplicaciones. Pulse en la palabra
Widgets. Se le mostrarn todos los Widgets disponibles en el dispositivo. Aadir un Widget en la
pantalla de inicio funciona exactamente igual que aadir un icono.
Si desea cambiar el fondo de pantalla, pulse en un lugar libre en una pantalla de inicio y mantenga el dedo
en la pantalla hasta que aparezca el menu de seleccin de fondos de pantalla.

ES - 8

Empleo de diversas pantallas iniciales


Tiene a su disposicin cinco pantallas de inicio configurables individualmente. Arrastrando
ligeramente hacia la izquierda o la derecha, se puede cambiar fcilmente entre las unas y las otras.

Pulsando la tecla Home se vuelve siempre automticamente hasta la pantalla de inicio central.

Aplicaciones preinstaladas en la pantalla inicial


En la pantalla inicial se encuentran diferentes aplicaciones preinstaladas:
-

Barra para la bsqueda con Google


Prediccin del tiempo
Browser
Musica
Galeria
E-Mail
Ajustes
AndroidPIT (Centro de aplicaciones)

A Enlace a la bsqueda con Google


B Vista general de aplicaciones
C Prediccin del tiempo mundial
D Aplicaciones en la pantalla de inicio
E Barra de estado: volver, inicio, ltimos
programas utilizados, horas, Wi-Fi, estado
de la batera

ES - 9

a) Barra de bsqueda para la bsqueda en Google

Pulse brevemente en la lupa para abrir la funcin de bsqueda con Google. Introduzca la palabra de
bsqueda deseada mediante el teclado virtual y pulse en Bsqueda. Se le mostrarn los resultados
disponibles de la bsqueda con Google.
Pulse en el micrfono para activar la entrada de voz. Ahora puede introducir la palabra de bsqueda de
forma simple, hablando claramente. La entrada de voz le propondr diversas palabras de bsqueda.
Active la palabra deseada pulsando brevemente y se le mostrarn los resultados de la bsqueda con
Google.

Consejo: mediante movimientos rpido de arriba a abajo, retirando a


continuacin sus dedos de la pantalla tctil, el aparato se desplaza
rpidamente por una lista. Esto funciona en todas aquellas
visualizaciones que sean de mayor tamao que la propia pantalla.

Advertencia: esta funcin requiere una conexin a Internet WLAN.

b) Resumen de las aplicaciones

Pulse en este smbolo para abrir la vista general de las aplicaciones. Aqu se le mostrarn todas las
aplicaciones instaladas en el dispositivo. Pulsando en el smbolo correspondiente podr iniciar directamente
la aplicacin deseada.

ES - 10

c) Previsin del tiempo


La aplicacin de previsin del tiempo le muestra la hora actual as como la hora, fecha, condiciones
meteorolgicas y temperatura en un lugar concreto.
Para modificar la configuracin, le rogamos que acceda a la opcin de resumen de aplicaciones y
marque el icono de previsin del tiempo. Aqu puede efectuar las modificaciones que considere.

Men de configuracin para la previsin del tiempo


Advertencia: esta funcin requiere una conexin a Internet WLAN.

d) WIFI
Para conectar el dispositivo a Internet, necesita una conexin inalmbrica. Para establecerla, pulse el
icono Wi-Fi en la pantalla de inicio o abra la configuracin inalmbrica en ajustes.
Advertencia: tenga en cuenta que necesita tener una red de WLAN al alcance desde su posicin actual.

Conexin automtica
Abra la configuracin inalmbrica mediante el icono Wi-Fi o mediante ajustes. Puede activar o
desactivar fcilmente la funcin inalmbrica. Basta con deslizar el interruptor virtual hacia la izquierda
hasta la posicin "On" para desactivar la funcin inalmbrica. La pantalla cambia a "Off".
Para activar de nuevo la funcin inalmbrica desactivada, deslice el interruptor virtual hacia la derecha.

En la configuracin inalmbrica aparecen en el lado derecho todas las redes disponibles y todas las
redes ya utilizadas.

ES - 11

Por favor escoja la red deseada y escriba la contrasea (password) para esa red WLAN, de modo que se
pueda establecer una conexin.

Dado el caso, confirme la contrasea introducida, teclendol, luego pulse Enter y, por ltimo, haga clic en
Conectar. Despus de un momento se establece la conexin.
Notas:
a) Si se cambia al aparato al modo Standby, la WLAN se desactivar automticamente. Esto reduce el consumo de energa y
conduce automticamente al aumento de la duracin de la batera. Cuando el aparato vuelve a pasar al modo activo, la conexin
WLAN se restaura automticamente. Esta operacin puede durar unos segundos.
b) La lista de las redes WLAN que se encuentran actualmente disponibles se actualiza automticamente.
c)
Cuando la funcin WLAN se encuentra activada, el aparato se conecta automticamente a una red anteriormente configurada,
siempre que se encuentre al alcance.
d) Cuando una red WLAN desconocida se encuentra al alcance, aparece un panel informativo en la pantalla.

Conexin manual
Para buscar de forma manual una red WLAN accesible, proceda como sigue:
(1) Abra los Ajustes.
(2) Ahora abra los Ajustes Wi-Fi y pulse en Escanear.
(3) En el caso de que la red Wi-Fi no aparezca en la lista de redes disponibles, seleccione el punto
Aadir red para introducir manualmente la red SSID, el protocolo de seguridad y, en caso de ser
necesario, la contrasea correspondiente. Para confirmar su entrada de datos, pulse Guardar.

e) Galera
Pulse brevemente el icono de galera para obtener un resumen de todos los lbumes y fotos disponibles.
Seleccione la galera deseada as como la imagen deseada con un breve clic. La imagen aparecer a
tamao de pantalla completa.

ES - 12

Pulse en el Smbolo de imgen

, para elegir entre distintas posibilidades de agrupacin.

Para visualizar la imagen siguiente o la anterior, mueva la imagen actual


con el dedo hacia la izquierda o derecha de la pantalla, segn proceda.

Coloque dos dedos sobre la pantalla tctil y estrelos para que la imagen
aumente de tamao. Si coloca los dedos juntos, la imagen disminuir de
tamao. Pulse breve- y rpidamente dos veces sobre la pantalla tctil para
que la imagen aumente su tamao automticamente y, al tocar
nuevamente la imagen dos veces, sta volver a su tamao habitual. Si se
toca brevemente la pantalla tctil aparecern otras funciones a su
disposicin.

Pulse en el smbolo de Menu


, para obtener ms opciones
Aqu pude iniciar una presentacin de diapositivas, editar
imgenes, girarlas, cortarlas, fijarlas como fondo de pantalla y
dejarse mostrar los detalles de la imgen.
Pulse en el smbolo de la papelera
seleccionada.
Pulse en el smbolo de compartir
por correo electrnico.

para eliminar la imagen


para enviar la imagen, p.ej.,

f) Msica
Pinche brevemente en el icono de msica de la pantalla inicial o del resumen de aplicaciones para abrir
la reproduccin de msica.
En el siguiente resumen tiene la oportunidad de escoger msica en base al intrprete, lbum, ttulo, lista
de reproduccin o reproduccin actual. Pulse brevemente sobre el smbolo correspondiente.
Intrprete

Muestra todos los datos musicales ordenados por intrprete.

lbum

Muestra todos los datos musicales ordenados por lbum.

Ttulo

Muestra todos los datos musicales ordenados por ttulo.

Lista de reproduccin

Muestra las listas de reproduccin creadas.

Reproduccin actual

Salta directamente a la reproduccin actual.

Escoja pinchando brevemente en el nombre de un fichero deseado y la reproduccin de msica


comienza.
ES - 13

Pantalla de reproduccin
(1) Reproduccin actual
(2) Activar / Desactivar la reproduccin aleatoria
(3) Opciones de repeticin:
a)
Repetir todos los ttulos
b)
Repetir los ttulos actuales
c)
La repeticin est desactivada
(4) Detalles del ttulo
(5) Ttulo anterior / posterior
(6) Play / Pausa
(7) Barra de tiempo

Seleccione el smbolo de pausa


para detener la reproduccin.
Para proseguir la reproduccin pulse el smbolo Play .
Pulse los smbolos de retroceder y avanzar /
para reproducir el ttulo anterior o siguiente.
Pulse en una posicin de la barra de tiempo para continuar la reproduccin directamente.
Pulse las teclas de volumen +/- en el lateral del dispositivo, para ajustar el volumen.
Para abrir la previsin de la lista de reproduccin actual, seleccione el smbolo de lista de
reproduccin. Pinche en un ttulo para poderlo reproducir directamente.
Para modificar el modo de repeticin, pulse el smbolo de modo de repeticin .
Para acceder a la pantalla inicial, pulse brevemente la tecla Home
. La reproduccin de
msica no parar. As se puede por ejemplo navegar en Internet y escuchar msica
simultneamente. Pulse de nuevo el icono de msica para volver a acceder a la reproduccin de
msica.

En el modo de repeticin se pueden efectuar otras configuraciones. Por favor pinche brevemente la
tecla del men

Biblioteca se visualiza un resumen de todos los ficheros de msica disponibles.


Party Shuffle activar o desactivar el modo de Party Schuffle.
Aadir a la lista de reproduccin aadir a la lista un ttulo actual.
Eliminar eliminar el ttulo que se est reproduciendo actualmente.
Efectos de sonido definir un efecto de sonido para una reproduccin de msica.

g) Vdeo
Pulse brevemente el icono de galeria en la pantalla de inicio o en el resumen de aplicaciones, para abrir
la reproduccin de vdeos.
Le van a ser mostrados diferentes archivos de vdeo procedentes de una lista. Escoja el archivo deseado
pinchando brevemente y el video comenzar.

ES - 14

h) App Center
En este aparato se encuentra preinstalado el App Center de AndroidPIT. Aqu encuentra diversas
aplicaciones, informes de tests, un blog y un foro.
Para ms informacin o ayuda sobre el funcionamiento del App Centers consulte la pgina web del
operador: www.androidpit.de.
Advertencia: esta funcin requiere una conexin a Internet WLAN.

i) Web Browser
Para iniciar el Web Browser, pinche en el icono Browser
que se encuentra en la pantalla inicial.
Para abrir una pgina de Internet, pulse en la parte superior de las entradas para visualizar la direccin
de Internet. El teclado virtual se abre ahora y usted puede elegir la direccin de la pgina de Internet
deseada. Pinche en comenzar o en el smbolo al lado del campo de entradas para abrir la pgina web.
Advertencia: no todas las redes ofrecen acceso a la red. Algunas redes ofrecen solo acceso a otros ordenadores locales conectados y
no conexin a Internet.

Utilizacin del teclado virtual


Pinche en el campo de entradas para abrir el teclado virtual. Puede componer un texto o acceder a
pginas de Internet.
a. Caps Lock (letras maysculas o minsculas)
b. Tecla para volver
c. Acceso al men de nmeros, smbolos y caracteres
especiales
d. Space Taste (espacio o entrada en blanco)
e. Comenzar (confirmacin de su entrada)

Insercin de smbolos
Para insertar un carcter especial como por ejemplo , mantenga pulsado con su dedo la tecla a para
acceder al men de caracteres especiales. Deslice su dedo ahora al carcter especial deseado, por
ejemplo la y despegue el dedo de la pantalla. De esta forma habr introducido una .

ES - 15

Empleo del Web Browsers

Puede desplazarse por la pantalla efectuando un movimiento de desplazamiento vertical con sus
dedos. Por favor no comience el movimiento en un punto del men o link, pues en ese caso podran
abrirse otras aplicaciones existentes.
Para abrir un link de Internet, pinche suavemente sobre el link. La nueva pgina se abrir de forma
automtica.
Para abrir el Menu del navegador web pulse la tecla de menu
. Aqu tiene a su disposicin distintas
funciones. Entre otras, puede actualizar la pgina web abierta, abrir una pestaa nueva, configurar
una pgina para que se pueda leer sin conexin o bien cambiar a los ajustes del navegador web.
Para volver a una pgina ya visitada, pulse la tecla volver
.
Para regresar directamente a la pantalla de inicio, pulse la tecla Home
.
Para insertar un texto, pinche en el campo correspondiente y emplee el teclado virtual para insertar
el texto.

Advertencia: esta funcin requiere una conexin a Internet WLAN.

j) Resumen de las aplicaciones


Pulse con brevedad el icono del resumen de aplicaciones, con el fin de abrir el resumen de
aplicaciones dado. Ahora visualiza un resumen de todas las aplicaciones preinstaladas e instaladas por
su cuenta. Abra la aplicacin deseada con un breve clic en el icono correspondiente.

Resumen de aplicaciones

k) Configuraciones del sistema


Pulse en el menu de aplicaciones en el icono de Ajustes para acceder a los ajustes de sistema.

En la parte izquierda del menu podr encontrar distintas categoras. Pulsando brevemente en la
entrada del menu elegido anteriormente se muestran las posibilidades de ajuste disponibles. Por
favor tenga en cuenta que no todas las funciones ofrecidas por Android son compatibles con este
dispositivo.
Una vez haya efectuado todos los ajustes podr volver al men anterior con la tecla Volver
o
bien cambiar directamente a la pantalla de inicio con la tecla Inicio
guardan automticamente.

ES - 16

Los datos introducidos se

Resumen de las configuraciones

Redes y redes
inalmbricas

Wi-Fi

Efecte aqu sus ajustes para Wi-Fi.

Ms

Aqu puede efectuar ms ajustes de red.


Ajuste aqu el volumen deseado y el sonido deseado para las notificaciones..
Adems puede activar o desactivar un tono de confirmacin al tocar la
pantalla tctil y un tono de advertencia al desbloquear el bloqueo de
pantalla.

Sonidos

Pantalla

Brillo Ajustar brillo de la pantalla.


Fondo Seleccin del fondo deseado.
Rotar pantalla automticamente Activar y desactivar la rotacin
automtica de la pantalla al girar el dispositivo.
Estado de reposo Ajuste el retardo en apagar la pantalla

Dispositivo

automticamente.
Tamao de letra Ajuste del tamao de letra deseado.
Memoria

Aqu obtendr informacin sobre la memoria interna y, en el caso de ser


utilizada, de su tarjeta MicroSD. Adems puede eliminar el contenido de la
memoria.

Usuario

Sistema

Batera

Aqu obtendr informacin sobre el estao de carga de la batera integrada.

Aplicaciones

Aqu podr administrar las aplicaciones instaladas y obtener informacin


sobre las aplicaciones.

Cuentas y
sincronizacin

Aqu puede establecer si quiere sincronizar las cuentas creadas y con qu


frecuencia.

Servicios de
ubicacin

Aqu podr permitir a las distintas aplicaciones Android reconocer su


ubicacin mediante redes inalmbricas y utilizar esta informacin (p.ej.
Google Maps). Adems podr establecer si desea que Google pueda
adaptar los resultados de bsqueda a su ubicacin.

Seguridad

Aqu podr, por ejemplo, establecer un bloqueo de pantalla y efectuar otros


ajustes relevantes en cuanto a seguridad.

Idioma e
introduccin

Aqu podr ajustar, por ejemplo, su idioma preferido, aadir palabras


diversas al diccionario personalizado y efectuar ajustes en el teclado..

Guardar y
restablecer

Aqu podr guardar sus ajustes de sistema y sus datos de aplicacin en


servidores de Google. Adems, tambin puede restablecer los ajustes de
fbrica. ATENCIN: En ese caso se borrarn todos los datos guardados en
el dispositivo.

Hora y fecha

Aqu podr ajustar la fecha, la hora, la zona horaria el formato de


visualizacin.

Sobre la tableta

Le muestra informacin sobre el dispositivo.

ES - 17

10.) Enviar / recibir e-mails


Este aparato cuenta con una aplicacin de email preinstalada. Se le permite utilizar su cuenta de email
para enviar y recibir emails.
Advertencia: esta funcin requiere una conexin a Internet WLAN.

Abra esta aplicacin a travs del icono E-Mail, que se encuentra en el men de aplicaciones.

Instalar su cuenta de email


(1) Inicie la aplicacin de email pinchando en el smbolo de e-mail. Ahora se le invita a instalar su cuenta
de e-mail.
(2) Inserte su direccin de e-mail as como su respectiva contrasea y pulse siguiente. Ponga un
nombre a su cuenta y establezca su nombre para los mensajes enviados. Pulse la tecla terminar
para concluir la configuracin. Su cuenta de e-mail pasar a ser la cuenta general en caso de que
tenga la opcin de enviar emails por defecto desde esa cuenta.
(3) Tambin puede instalar su cuenta de email manualmente. Introduzca su direccin de e-mail y la
contrasea correspondiente, y pulse el setup manual para insertar las informaciones del servidor
de e-mail.

(4) Seleccione entre tipos de servidores (Servertypen POP3, IMAP o Exchange) para la recepcin de
emails.
Advertencia: si desconoce qu configuraciones ha de efectuar, consulte por favor a su proveedores por e-mail, su administrador
de red, o busque las informaciones requeridas en Internet partiendo de los trminos Direccin POP y nombre de su proveedor.

(5) Introduzca la siguiente informacin (Servicio, Puerto etc.).


(6) Elija el tipo de servidor para los e-mails a enviar e inserte las informaciones necesarias.
(7) Pulse continuar para continuar con el men. La aplicacin de e-mail verifica ahora las
configuraciones del servicio efectuadas. Una vez concluida la instalacin de manera satisfactoria
aparece el siguiente aviso: tu cuenta est instalada y los emails estn de camino. Su cuenta est
ahora configurada.
(8) Proporcione un nombre a su cuenta y pulse terminar para concluir el proceso.
Nota: si posee ms de una direccin de correo electrnico, tendr acceso a la cuenta general siempre que se inicie la aplicacin de email.

ES - 18

Administracin de una cuenta de correo electrnico


Agregar un buzn de correo nuevo:
(1) Abra la aplicacin de correo electrnico y pulse en la tecla Menu
para mostrar las opciones
adicionales. Seleccione el punto de menu Ajustes y despus Aadir cuenta, para crear un nuevo
buzn de correo.
(2) Siga el asistente de configuracin para crear un nuevo buzn de correo.

Borrar un buzn de correo:


(1) Abra la aplicacin de correo electrnico y pulse en la tecla Menu
para mostrar las opciones
adicionales. Seleccione el punto de menu Ajustes y despus Eliminar cuenta, para borrar la cuenta
deseada

Comprobacin de las propiedades de las cuentas:


(1) Abra la aplicacin de correo electrnico y pulse en la tecla Menu
para mostrar las opciones
adicionales y seleccione Ajustes. En el lado izquierdo del menu aparecern todos los buzones de
correo creados.
(2) Pulse en el buzn de correo deseado para mostrar los ajustes de la cuenta.
(3) Pulse en las propiedades de cuenta a ser cambiadas para efectuar los cambios deseados

Verificar las propiedades de cuenta:

Abra su aplicacin de e-mail y pulse la tecla del men E-Mail


para visualizar otras opciones.
Pulse en cuentas para poder visualizar la cuenta en concreto.
Mantenga pulsado el dedo en la configuracin de cuenta, hasta que surja un campo de
informaciones.
Pulse brevemente la opcin opciones de cuenta y se visualizarn todas las configuraciones de
email de la cuenta. Ahora puede modificar todas las configuraciones.

Ver mensajes de email


Abra la aplicacin de e-mail haciendo un breve click sobre el icono del e-mail. Su buzn se puede ahora
visualizar.
A travs de movimientos verticales puede desplazar sus e-mails.
Haga click en un e-mail determinado con el fin de abrirlo.
Mantenga el dedo pulsado en un e-mail determinado, para poder visualizar otras opciones. Ahora
aparece un panel de informacin. Usted puede aqu abrir el e-mail, contestarlo, reenviarlo o
eliminarlo.
ES - 19

Escribir mensajes de correo electrnico


(1) Pulse en la vista general del correo electrnico en el smbolo Email en la barra de menu superior y se
abrir una ventana nueva, en el cual puede escribir un nuevo correo electrnico.
(2) Ahora introduzca la direccin de correo electrnico del destinatario, un asunto y el texto en los
campos previstos para ello. Tambin puede aadir CC/CCO para enviar un correo electrnico a varios
destinatarios.
(3) Pulse en Enviar, para enviar el correo electrnico. Pulse en Guardar para guardar el correo
electrnico introducido como borrador. Si pulsa en el Smbolo de la papelera, se borrar el correo
electrnico introducido actualmente.

11.) Gestin de aplicaciones


Aplicaciones pre-instaladas
Este aparato se entrega con aplicaciones preinstaladas. La idea de estas aplicaciones se encuentra en el
resumen de aplicaciones . A ellas corresponde el reproductor de vdeo y de audio, el browser de
Internet, la alarma, la calculadora y otras ms. Para proceder a la apertura de estas aplicaciones ha de
pulsar brevemente el botn correspondiente.

Instalacin de las aplicaciones


Para instalar aplicaciones en el aparato, rogamos que siga los pasos siguientes:
(1) Descargue su Software (por ejemplo, el Androidpit Market). Asegrese de que est manejando un
fichero APK.
(2) Si ha descargado los datos en el ordenador, conecte el aparato al ordenador por medio de un cable
USB y copie los datos a la memoria interna.
(3) Separe al aparato del ordenador y abra el Explorer para poder acceder a los datos copiados.
(4) Siga las indicaciones de instalacin en la pantalla para instalar la aplicacin.
(5) Una vez la instalacin ha terminado exitosamente, encuentre la nueva aplicacin en el men de
aplicaciones.

Desinstalacin de aplicaciones

(1) Por favor abra los ajustes de sistema pulsando brevemente el icono Ajustes en la vista general de las
aplicaciones.
(2) Pulse ahora brevemente en el punto de menu Aplicaciones, para llegar a los Ajustes de Aplicacin.
(3) Seleccione entre los puntos primarios bajados, memoria USB, activo y todos la vista general
deseada, pulsando brevemente.
(4) Ahora elige la aplicacin que desea desinstalar, pulsando brevemente.
(5) Ahora pulse enDesinstalar y confirme con OK, para desinstalar la aplicacin del dispositivo.

Advertencia: no se puede eliminar Software que ya haya sido preinstalado

ES - 20

12.) Administrador de archivos


Abra la vista general de la aplicacin y haga clic en el icon del administrador de archivos para arrancar
el administrador de archivos.

Navegar a travs de archivos y carpetas

Puede elegir entre la memoria interna, la tarjeta de memoria (si el tablet dispone de ella), USB (si
est conectado al tablet), todos los archivos de imagen disponibles al igual que todos los archivos
de fichero disponibles. Haga clic en el lugar de almacenamiento deseado para visualizar una lista
de los archivos contenidos en l o elija el icon para los archivos de imagen y de video para
visualizar todos los archivos de este tipo.
Con un deslizamiento vertical puede desplazarse por los archivos y carpetas. Abra un archivo o
una carpeta tocndolo brevemente.

Puede deshacer un paso

tocando brevemente el icon correspondiente.

Usar la barra de herramientas

Cambiar directamente al directorio principal.

Memoria interna

Tarjeta Micro SD (si el tablet dispone de ella)

Memoria USB (si est conectada con el tablet)

Visualiza todas las imgenes disponibles

Visualiza todos los videos disponibles

Aqu se pueden visualizar todos los procedimientos actuales.

Editor: Aqu puede pegar, borrar, copiar o mover archivos.


Toque el archivo deseado y aparece una flecha delante del
nombre del archivo. Elija a continuacin la funcin deseada.

ES - 21

Copiar, mover y renombrar archivos y carpetas


1.)
2.)
3.)
4.)

5.)
6.)

Navegue hasta el archivo deseado en el directorio de archivos.


Mantenga el dedo en el archivo hasta que se abra un campo de informacin.
Elija a continuacin la funcin deseada. Puede elegir entre borrar el archivo (Delete file),
renombrar el archivo, copiar el archivo y mover el archivo (Move File),
Para copiar o mover toque brevemente el icon correspondiente (Copy / Move) y navegue a
continuacin al directorio meta. Toque a continuacin el icon de editor
y elija
tocando brevemente Paste para pegar el archivo.
Para borrar un archivo, toque Delete y confirme otra vez con borrar. Para anular toque
brevemente "anular.
Para renombrar un archivo toque renombrar archivo e introduzca a continuacin el nuevo
nombre de archivo mediante el teclado virtual. Confirme mediante renombrar" o anule el
procedimiento mediante anular.

13.) Leer documentos de Office


En este aparato ya se encuentra instalada la aplicacin Office Suite para leer documentos de Office.
Puede leer documentos de Word, Excel o Powerpoint.
1.)
2.)
3.)
4.)

Copie los ficheros de Office deseados al aparato.


Abra la aplicacin Office Suite.
Utilice el navegador Explorer para los ficheros deseados.
Elija los ficheros deseados pulsando brevemente y moviendo el dedo horizontal- y
verticalmente sobre la pantalla, de forma que sea posible pasar de pgina. Pulse la tecla del
men para abrir otras opciones. Puede, por ejemplo, buscar un texto determinado o contar
palabras.

ES - 22

14.) Administrador de tareas


Este aparato es multitareas. Por tanto, usted puede abrir al mismo tiempo diferentes aplicaciones. Por
ejemplo, puede escuchar msica y, al mismo tiempo, navegar en Internet y ver fotografas.
Puede darse el caso de que demasiadas aplicaciones se encuentren activas en el fondo de la pantalla y al
mismo tiempo. En ese caso le rogamos que abra la aplicacin Task Killer y finalice todas aquellas
aplicaciones que no le son necesarias en el momento.
(1) Abra la aplicacin Task Killer.
(2) Seleccione las aplicaciones que no
necesita en ese momento.

(3)

Para confirmar su eleccin presione brevemente


selected apps.

el smbolo denominado Kill

15.) Condiciones de garanta limitada


La garanta cubre solamente la sustitucin de este producto de Intenso. La garanta no es vlida en el caso
de desgastes resultantes de un uso inadecuado, negligencia, accidentes, incompatibilidad, o rendimiento
insuficiente por parte de un cierto Hardware o Software de ordenador.
El derecho a la garanta expira en caso de incumplimiento de las instrucciones elaboradas por Intenso as
como en caso de montaje o uso indebido o defectos causados por otros aparatos.
En caso de que el producto est expuesto a vibraciones, descargas electroestticas, influencia del calor o
de la humedad, o en cualquier otro caso en que se exponga al producto ms all de sus especificaciones,
no existe derecho a garanta.
Intenso no se responsabiliza por la prdida de datos o por daos colaterales o subsecuentes, por la
violacin de las condiciones de garanta y por otros daos, independientemente de cules sean sus causas.
Este producto no se debe destinar a un uso comercial o a niveles medicinales o especiales, en los que una
avera del producto pueda causar lesiones, fallecimiento o elevados daos materiales.

ES - 23

16.) Datos tcnicos


CPU
Memoria
Sistema operativo
Sistemas operativos
compatibles
Posibilidades de conectar
WLAN
G-Sensor
Formato de fotografa
Formato de audio
Formato de video
Pantalla
Cmara
SNR
rea de frecuencia
Transformador
Batera integrada

1 GHz Cortex A8
512 MB DDR 3
Android 4.0.4
Windows XP / Vista / 7 / Linux 2,4 y superior / Mac 10.6 y superior
Auriculares, Micro SD (SDHC), Micro USB
WiFi (802.11 b/g/n)
Rotacin de 360 grados
JPEG, BMP, GIF, PNG
MP3, WMA, WAV, OGG, FLAC, APE
MPEG1, MPEG 4, FLV
TFT LCD pantalla, 800 x 480 Pixels
0,3 MP cmara frontal
>= 80 dB
20 Hz 20 KHz
(V) AC Adaptador (Ktec KSAS0100500200HE): AC Input 100240V50/60Hz, DC Output 5V / 2A
Batera recargable de iones de litio y polmero

17.) Manutencin del aparato


Nunca roce o acerque un aerosol o un lquido directamente a la pantalla o
cubierta del aparato

18.) Limpieza del aparato


Limpie la caja, el armazn y la pantalla con un p ao reblandecido, libre de
pelusa y de qumicos. Utilice nicamente detergentes que son exclusivos para
limpiar pantallas.

19.) Eliminacin de aparatos electrnicos fuera de uso


Los aparatos identificados con este smbolo estn sujetos a la
Directiva Europea 2002/96/EC.
Todos los equipamientos elctricos y electrnicos han de separarse
de la basura domstica y deben ser eliminados por las respectivas
instituciones pblicas.
La eliminacin debida de equipamientos electrnicos evita la
contaminacin del medio ambiente.

ES - 24

20.) La licencia informacin


Notice of GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE and LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENCE
Dear Customer,
If interested, you and any third party can download the source code of used GPL / LGPL from Intenso
Webpage http://www.intenso.de . The source code of the desired product is available to anyone on the
selection of valid product category and the desired device. In the product details you will find the entry
"drivers". Open this menu to download the corresponding GPL / LGPL code. For a fee of 35 (delivery to
another country as Germany), it is also possible to obtain this code by postal delivery. More information
about the GPL/LGPL-Licence can you nd on following website www.gnu.org
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast,
the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software-to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free
Software Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other
Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Lesser General Public License instead.) You can
apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are
designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this
service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the
software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you
to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of
the software, or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the
recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code.
And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives
you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.
Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is
no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its
recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not
reflect on the original authors' reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that
redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program
proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use
or not licensed at all.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder
saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below, refers to
any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" means either the Program or any derivative
work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or
with modifications and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without
limitation in the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you".
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside
its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if
its contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made by running the
Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any
ES - 25

medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright
notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of
any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty
protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the
Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided
that you also meet all of these conditions:
a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the
date of any change.
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from
the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of
this License.
c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when started
running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an
appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a
warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the user how to
view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an
announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not
derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as
separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the
Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other
licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you;
rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on
the Program.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work
based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under
the scope of this License.
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or
executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed
under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge no
more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the
corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium
customarily used for software interchange; or,
c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code.
(This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object
code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an
executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the
executable. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is
normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on)
of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the
executable.
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then
offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source
code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this
License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will
automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights,
from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full
compliance.
5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants
you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by
ES - 26

law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based
on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for
copying, distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it.
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatically
receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms
and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted
herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License.
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not
limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise)
that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If
you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other
pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a
patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies
directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance
of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to
contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free
software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made
generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent
application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software
through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this
License.
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by
copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an
explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in
or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in
the body of this License.
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public License
from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this
License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions
either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does
not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free
Software Foundation.
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are
different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software
Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will
be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of
promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE
PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE
STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE
PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE,
YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY
COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE
PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL,
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO
USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED
INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE
PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER
ES - 27

PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.


END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way
to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source
file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the "copyright"
line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
one line to give the program's name and an idea of what it does.
Copyright (C) yyyy name of author
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
GNU General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode:
Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author
Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details
type `show w'. This is free software, and you are welcome
to redistribute it under certain conditions; type `show c'
for details.
The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate parts of the General Public
License. Of course, the commands you use may be called something other than `show w' and `show c'; they
could even be mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a "copyright
disclaimer" for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright
interest in the program `Gnomovision'
(which makes passes at compilers) written
by James Hacker.
signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1989
Ty Coon, President of Vice

ES - 28

Intenso GmbH
Fecha:12 de julio de 2013

Declaracin de conformidad CE
Nosotros, la empresa Intenso GmbH,
con sede social en la Diepholzer Str. 15 en 49377 Vechta, Alemania
declaramos bajo nuestra responsabilidad que el producto:
Modelo: 7 TAB 714 (Artculo N 5509852)
Descripcin: Ordenador-tabla
cumple con las siguientes directrices y normativas:
Normativa R&TTE 1999/5/CE

EN 301 489-1 V1.9.2


EN 301 489-17 V2.1.1
EN 300 328 V1.7.1 : 2006-10
EN 55022:2010 (Class B)
EN 55024:2010
EN 61000-3-2:2006+A1 :2009+A2 :2009 (Class D)
EN 61000-3-3:2008

Normativa de baja tensin 2006/95/CE

EN 60950-1:2006+A11:2009+A1:2010+A12:2011+A12: correccin 2012


Normativa de diseo ecolgico 2009/125/CE

1275/2008

278/2009
Los documentos tcnicos relaciones con el dispositivo arriba mencionado han sido depositados en:
Normativa de ROHS 2011/65/EU
Intenso GmbH
Diepholzer Str. 15, 49377 Vechta. Alemania
Persona autorizada:

____________________________
Director ejecutivo: Thomas Phlking

ES - 29

Manual de instrues TAB 714


Obrigado por ter escolhido o nosso produto TAB714. Siga as seguintes orientaes, para obter
maiores informaes sobre este aparelho.

1.) ndice
1.) ndice ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1
2.) Avisos .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2
3.) Resumo do aparelho ............................................................................................................................................................................. 4
4.) Contedo da embalagem ...................................................................................................................................................................... 4
5.) Carregar a bateria.................................................................................................................................................................................. 5
6.) Utilizar um carto micro SD/SDHC ........................................................................................................................................................ 5
7.) Transferncia de dados entre o aparelho e o computador .................................................................................................................... 5
8.) Ecr tctil ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 6
9.) O ecr inicial .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 7
Visualizao................................................................................................................................................................................................ 7
Desbloquear o ecr..................................................................................................................................................................................... 7
Barra de Estado .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 8
Ajustando a tela principal ............................................................................................................................................................................ 8
Utilizar diversos ecrs iniciais ..................................................................................................................................................................... 9
Aplicaes pr-instaladas no ecr inicial .................................................................................................................................................... 9
a) Barra de pesquisa para a pesquisa no Google ................................................................................................................................. 10
b) Resumo das aplicaes........................................................................................................................................................................ 10
c) Previso do tempo ................................................................................................................................................................................ 11
d) WIFI ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 11
Ligao automtica ................................................................................................................................................................................... 11
Conexo manual ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 12
e) Galeria .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 12
f) Msica ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 13
g) Vdeo .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 14
h) App Center ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 15
i) Web Browser ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 15
Utilizao do teclado virtual ...................................................................................................................................................................... 15
Inserir smbolos ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 15
Utilizao do Web Browser ....................................................................................................................................................................... 16
j) Resumo das aplicaes ......................................................................................................................................................................... 16
k) Configuraes do sistema .................................................................................................................................................................... 16
Resumo das configuraes ...................................................................................................................................................................... 17
10.) Enviar / receber emails ...................................................................................................................................................................... 18
Instalar a conta de e-mail.......................................................................................................................................................................... 18
Gerenciando uma conta E-mail ................................................................................................................................................................ 19
Ver mensagens de e-mail ......................................................................................................................................................................... 19
Escrever mensagens via e-mail ................................................................................................................................................................ 19
11.) Gerir aplicaes ................................................................................................................................................................................. 20
Instalar aplicaes .................................................................................................................................................................................... 20
Desinstalar aplicaes .............................................................................................................................................................................. 20
12.) Gestor de ficheiros............................................................................................................................................................................. 21
Navegar por ficheiros e pastas ................................................................................................................................................................. 21
Utilizar a barra de ferramentas ................................................................................................................................................................. 21
Copiar, mover e mudar o nome de ficheiros e pastas............................................................................................................................... 22
13.) Ler documentos de Office.................................................................................................................................................................. 22
14.) Task Manager.................................................................................................................................................................................... 23
15.) Condies de garantia limitada ......................................................................................................................................................... 23
16.) Dados tcnicos .................................................................................................................................................................................. 24
17.) Manuteno do aparelho ................................................................................................................................................................... 24
18.) Limpeza do aparelho ......................................................................................................................................................................... 24
19.) Eliminao de aparelhos electrnicos fora de uso ............................................................................................................................ 24
20.) Licena informao............................................................................................................................................................................ 25
Declarao de conformidade CE ................................................................................................................................................................... 29

PT - 1

Este manual pode eventualmente no conter todas as funes do seu aparelho. Para utilizar aplicaes de operadores
terceiros, contacte o operador. Por favor note que todas as especificaes podem ser alteradas sem pr-aviso. Para
informaes actuais consulte www.intenso.de
Marca
Google, e Google-Logo e Android so marcas da Google. Todos os outros nomes de produtos ou servios
pertencem aos respectivos proprietrios.

2.) Avisos

Evite um embate duro do aparelho. No o coloque em superfcies inclinadas para assim evitar
uma queda do aparelho.

No utilize o aparelho em zonas extremamente frias, quentes, hmidas ou cheias de p. Evite


tambm a exposio directa ao sol.

Evite a utilizao em lugares arenosos.

No utilize o aparelho em proximidades com risco a exploses, tais como bombas de gasolina.

Evite a utilizao sob almofadas, sofs ou outros objectos que apoiem a criao de calor, pois
existe risco de sobre-aquecimento do aparelho.

Guarde regularmente os seus dados para evitar uma eventual perda de dados. No somos
responsveis por uma eventual perda de dados.

No separe a ligao no momento de transferncia de dados ou formatao do aparelho, pois


pode causar uma perda de dados.

Imagens e filmes podem estar protegidos por direitos de terceiros. A reproduo sem licena
pode violar direitos de autor.

Evite a utilizao em campos altamente magnetizados.

Proteja o seu aparelho de humidade. Se entrar humidade no aparelho, desligue-o


imediatamente, limpe e seque-o.

No utilize solues qumicas para limpar o aparelho. Utilize apenas um pano seco.

No posicione chamas abertas, tais como velas acesas, perto ou em cima do aparelho.

No somos responsveis por danos em caso de funcionamento incorrecto, por perda de dados,
manuseamento incorrecto, reparaes do aparelho ou troca de bateria feitas por mo prpria.

Caso o aparelho no reaja s suas entradas, utilize o boto de repr no verso do aparelho para
o voltar a iniciar.

Quando no o utilizar, retire o transformador da fonte de energia.

A tomada deve se encontrar perto do aparelho e ser de fcil acesso.

PT - 2

Utilize o transformador apenas em tomadas ligadas terra com AC 100-240V~, 50/60 Hz. Caso
no tenha certeza da fonte de energia no local de colocao, consulte o respectivo distribuidor
de energia.

Utilize apenas o transformador e o cabo de ligao rede fornecidos.

Para interromper o abastecimento de energia para o seu aparelho, retire o transformador da


tomada. Segure o transformador sempre quando o retirar da tomada. Nunca puxe pelo fio.

No abra a caixa do adaptador de rede. Em caso de caixa aberta existe perigo de vida devido a
choque elctrico. No contm peas que requeiram manuteno.

Em caso de no-utilizao durante um longo perodo, a bateria do aparelho descarrega-se


lentamente. Antes de a voltar a utilizar, deve recarreg-la.

Por favor elimine o aparelho ou a bateria de forma ecolgica.

Por favor no desmonte o aparelho em componentes e no tente repar-lo por si mesmo, pois
a garantia expira nesse caso.

No utilize o aparelho em locais, onde a utilizao de aparelhos mveis seja proibido. No use
o aparelho perto de outros aparelhos elctricos, pois pode causar interferncias devido aos
sinais de alta frequncia.

No utilize o aparelho perto de marca-passos, em hospitais ou perto de aparelhos mdicos,


pois pode causar interferncias devido aos sinais de alta frequncia. Mantenha uma distncia
mnima de 15cm de um marca-passos. Consulte o produtor desses aparelhos para obter
informaes sobre a utilizao comum.

A utilizao de auriculares com um volume demasiado alto pode causar danos permanentes na
audio.

Por motivos de segurana no trnsito, o aparelho no deve ser utilizado pelo condutor durante a
conduo.

PT - 3

3.) Resumo do aparelho

1.)Boto de ligar / desligar: mantenha


premido para desligar o aparelho; premir
brevemente para mudar entre standby e
modo activo.
2.)Conector de auricular 3.5mm

5.)Leitor de cartes micro SD


6.)Volume +/7.)Touchscreen
8.)Cmara na frente

3.)Tomada micro USB


4.)Entrada DC 5V 2A

4.) Contedo da embalagem


Por favor verifique se o contedo da embalagem est completo:

TAB 714
Auricular Stereo
Cabo USB
Transformador 5V 2.0A
Manual de instrues
USB Dongle

PT - 4

5.) Carregar a bateria


Por favor carregue a bateria do seu aparelho antes da primeira utilizao completamente. Ligue o
transformador fornecido ao aparelho e a uma tomada. O carregamento completo demora
aproximadamente 5 horas.
O estado de carga exibido durante o funcionamento na barra de status. Com bloqueamento de display o
estado de carga atual exibido em porcentagem.
Desligado, ao pressionar brevemente uma das teclas, exibido um smbolo de bateria no display. Durante o
processo de carga ser exibido atravs de uma animao uma bateria sendo enchida em varios nveis.
Assim que o acumulador estiver completamente carregado a animao termina e a bateria exibida
completamente cheia.

Notas:
a. Ao atingir 15% do rendimento restante da bateria, receber um aviso no ecr. Deve agora ligar o transformador a uma tomada
para carregar a bateria, evitar uma eventual perda de dados e aumentar a durao do transformador.
b. Pode utilizar o aparelho enquanto carregar a bateria. No entanto e para garantir uma durao duradoura da bateria, pedimos que
no utilize o aparelho.
c. Para assegurar um bom rendimento deve utilizar regularmente a bateria integrada. Caso utilizar raramente o aparelho, carregue a
bateria pelo menos uma vez por ms completamente.
d. Assegure-se que utilize apenas o transformador fornecido para carregar a bateria.

6.) Utilizar um carto micro SD/SDHC


Este aparelho consegue ler dados diretamente de um carto micro SD/SDHC.
Para utilizar um carto micro SD/SDHC, coloque o carto no leitor no lado inferior do aparelho (I). Utilize
o explorador pr-instalado (mais informaes encontrar no manual de utilizador pormenorizado)
para ler os dados disponveis no carto de memria. Selecione para tal o explorador no diretrio SD
Card.

7.) Transferncia de dados entre o aparelho e o computador


Ligue o aparelho atravs do cabo USB fornecido a um computador.

1.) No aparelho visualiza-se ento o ecr para a ligao com USB.


2.) Toque brevemente em activar memria USB. O aparelho reconhecido como suporte de dados
mvel e recebe a informao memria USB em utilizao. Tocando brevemente no boto Home
permite-lhe continuar a utilizar o aparelho de forma normal. Desde o seu computador tem agora
acesso memria interna do aparelho permitindo-lhe copiar, apagar ou mover dados no aparelho.
3.) Quando houver uma conexo USB no seu computador, aparecer na barra de tarefas um smbolo USB.
A barra de tarefas avanada (clicar sobre o relgio na barra de tarefas para abrir) mostra informaes
adicionais para ativar e desativar a conexo USB.

PT - 5

Para desativar o dispositivo de memria, clique sobre desativar dispositivo USB.

Clique sobre a funo remover hardware com segurana


USB do seu computador.

, para remover o dispositivo

Nota: As aplicaes pr-instaladas e o sistema operativo Android ocupam uma parte da memria interna requer aprox. 1 GB do
espao da memria. Por essa razo no tem a memria inteira sua disposio.

8.) Ecr tctil


Este aparelho comandado por um Touchscreen. Com seus dedos poder clicar suavemente no
Touchscreen para facilmente iniciar a aplicao, digitar textos em teclado virtual e arrastando na
respectiva direo modificar as telas principais.
Por favor retire a pelcula protectora do ecr antes de utilizar o aparelho.
O ecr tctil identifica pequenas cargas elctricas, tais como as emitidas pelo dedo humano e define assim
o ponto de entrada.
Portanto prefervel utilizar as pontas dos dedos para fazer entradas. A utilizao atravs de um lpis ou
outro objecto pontiagudo no possvel.
O ecr tctil no deve entrar em contacto com gua ou outros equipamentos elctricos para assim evitar
um mau funcionamento e avarias permanentes.
Nota:
a.
Caso o ecr tctil no utilizado durante dois minutos, o aparelho passa para standby. Prima brevemente na tecla para ligar /
desligar para ir para o modo activo.
b.
O bloqueio do teclado encontra-se activado automaticamente para evitar entradas indesejadas. Desbloqueie o teclado no ecr
tctil. Toque no cadeado fechado

no mostrador e mantenha-o pressionado. Arraste agora o cadeado para o cadeado aberto

que apareceu agora no mostrador e solte o seu dedo do mostrador. O ecr est agora desbloqueado.

Pode rodar o aparelho para todas as direces, pois possui um sensor que ajusta o ecr
automaticamente.

PT - 6

9.) O ecr inicial


Visualizao

Desbloquear o ecr
Se o ecr ttil no for utilizado durante dois minutos, o aparelho muda para o modo de espera.
Pressione brevemente a tecla Ligar / Desligar para mudar para o modo ativo. O mostrador est
bloqueado para proteger de uma utilizao acidental. Toque no cadeado fechado
no mostrador e
mantenha-o pressionado. Arraste agora o cadeado para o cadeado aberto
que apareceu agora no
mostrador e solte o seu dedo do mostrador. O ecr est agora desbloqueado.

Puxe o smbolo da fechadura com o seu dedo na direco da seta

Aviso: Arraste o smbolo do cadeado para o smbolo da cmara que apareceu para abrir diretamente a
aplicao da cmara.

PT - 7

Barra de Estado
A barra de estado encontra-se na parte inferior do ecr principal. Ela tem as seguintes funcionalidades:
Voltar atrs

Programas usados
recentemente

Aceder ao ecr inicial

Hora

Estado da bateria

Ligao WLAN

Aqui obtm informaes sobre:

os programas que utilizou na ltima vez


a fora do sinal da ligao WLAN atual
a hora atual
o estado atual da bateria

Pode executar as seguintes funes:

iniciar o ecr principal


retrocer um passo em cada menu
iniciar os programas utilizados na ltima vez

Clicando sobre o relgio, se abrir a barra de tarefas avanada. Onde ser visualizada uma
notificao com o status atual, Clicando novamente sobre o relgio na barra de tarefas avanada,
iro aparecer diferentes opes de incio rpido, como por exemplo, o acesso para as configuraes.
Ajustando a tela principal
possvel ajustar facilmente a tela principal de acordo com as necessidades individuais. Para cancelar
um cone, toque com seus dedos por alguns segundos sobre o cone e arraste-o at smbolo X
visualizado. Tire o dedo do Touchscreen e o cone ser cancelado.
Para posicionar um cone da lista de aplicaes na tela principal clique por alguns segundos com o
dedo sobre o cone da aplicao desejada, que este aparecer na tela principal. Arraste o cone para a
posio desejada e tire o dedo do Touchscreen. O cone foi posicionado na tela principal. Se um cone
for posicionado sobre outro cone, automaticamente se abrir uma pasta com ambos os cones. Toque a
pasta para visualizar os cones registrados e toque suavemente sobre um cone para escolher o desejado.
tambm possvel adicionar Widgets na tela inicial. Para isto, toque a
tecla no canto superior direito
da tela inicial, que o menu das aplicaes se abrir. Clique, ento, na palavra Widgets. Iro aparecer
todos os Widgets disponveis no aparelho. Para adicionar um Widgets na tela principal, proceda
exatamente como para adicionar um cone.
Para modificar a imagem de fundo, toque sobre um espao livre da tela inicial e segure com o dedo at
aparecer sobre o display o menu de imagens de fundo para escolher uma nova imagem.

PT - 8

Utilizar diversos ecrs iniciais


possvel adaptar individualmente, escolhendo entre as cinco telas principais disponveis. Um simples
movimento de arrastar com o dedo para a esquerda ou direita, poder mudar de uma para a outra.

Prima a tecla Home para voltar automaticamente ao ecr inicial central.

Aplicaes pr-instaladas no ecr inicial


As vrias aplicaes esto pr-instaladas no ecr inicial:
-

Barra de pesquisa para Pesquisa Google


Previso do tempo
Browser
Msica
Galeria de fotos
E-Mail
Configurao
AndroidPIT (App Center)

A Atalho para Pesquisa Google


B Lista das aplicaes
C Previso do tempo no mundo
D Aplicaes na tela principal
E Barra de tarefas: voltar, home, recente,
programas utilizados, relgio, Wi-Fi,
nvel da bateria

PT - 9

a) Barra de pesquisa para a pesquisa no Google

Toque suavemente sobre a Lupa, para abrir as funes de pesquisa do Google. Digite o termo desejado
no teclado virtual e clique Vai. Os resultados de busca do Google iro aparecer.
Toque suavemente sobre o microfone, para ativar o reconhecimento de voz. possvel fazer uma busca
por voz simplesmente falando corretamente. O reconhecimento da voz prope vrias possibilidades de
termos para a busca. Confirme o termo desejado com um leve toque e o resultado de busca do Google
Pesquisa aparecer.

Dica: Se movimentar rpido para cima ou para baixo e retirar a seguir o dedo do
ecr tctil, o aparelho desloca-se rapidamente pela lista. Isto vlido para todas as
visualizaes que sejam maiores do que o ecr.

Nota: Esta funo requer uma ligao WLAN Internet.

b) Resumo das aplicaes

Toque sobre este smbolo, para abrir a lista das aplicaes. Ser visualizada a lista das aplicaes
instaladas sobre este aparelho. Tocando suavemente sobre o smbolo da aplicao desejada, esta ser
inicializada.

PT - 10

c) Previso do tempo
O widget da previso do tempo mostra-lhe num s olhar a hora definida, a data, as condies do tempo
e a temperatura no local definido.
Para alterar as definies, aceda ao resumo das aplicaes e toque no cone da previso do tempo.
Aqui pode efectuar as alteraes pretendidas.

Menu de configurao para a previso do tempo


Nota: Esta funo requer uma ligao WLAN Internet..

d) WIFI
Para ligar o aparelho com a Internet, necessita de uma ligao WLAN. Para estabelecer a ligao, toque
no cone Wi-Fi no ecr principal ou aceda s configuraes em configuraes WLAN.
Note: Por favor considere que necessita de uma rede de WLAN no alcance da sua posio actual.

Ligao automtica
Aceda atravs do cone Wi-Fi ou configuraes s configuraes WLAN. Aqui pode ativar ou desativar
facilmente a funo WLAN. Arraste o comutador virtual da posio Ligado para a esquerda para
desativar a funo WLAN. O mostrador muda agora para Desligado.
Para ativar novamente a funo WLAN desativada, arraste o comutador virtual para a direita.

Nas configuraes WLAN so-lhe mostradas, do lado direito, todas as redes disponveis, assim como
todas as redes anteriormente utilizadas.
PT - 11

Toque na rede pretendida e insira caso necessrio a chave de WLAN (palavra-passe) adequada para
estabelecer uma ligao.

Confirme eventualmente a palavra-passe tocando na tecla Enter e toque agora em conectar. Aps um
breve momento, a ligao estabelecida.
Notas:
a) Se o aparelho entrar em standby, o WLAN automaticamente desactivado, reduzindo assim o consumo de energia e
aumentando a durao da bateria. Quando o aparelho voltar para o modo activo, a conexo com o WLAN reestabelecida
automaticamente. Isso pode demorar uns segundos.
b) A lista das redes WLAN actualmente disponveis actualizada automaticamente.
c)
Com a funo de WLAN activada, o aparelho conecta-se automaticamente a uma rede anteriormente configurada, caso esteja no
alcance.
d) Caso se encontrar uma rede de WLAN desconhecida no alcance, surge uma informao.

Conexo manual
Siga as instrues abaixo para procurar uma rede Wi-Fi acessvel:
(1) Clique em configuraes.
(2) Clique configuraes Wi-Fi e depois clique sobre transferir dados.
(3) Se a rede Wi-Fi no aparecer na lista das redes disponveis, clique sobre o ponto adicionar rede e
digite manualmente a rede SSID, o protocolo de segurana e tambm a sua respectiva senha. Para
confirmar os dados, clique sobre Salvar.

e) Galeria
Toque brevemente no cone da galeria para obter uma listagem de todos os lbuns e imagens.
Seleccione a galeria pretendida e a seguir a imagem pretendida premindo novamente. A imagem
apresentada no ecr inteiro.

PT - 12

Toque sobre o smbolo de imagens


agrupamentos.

, para escolher entre as diferentes possibilidades de

Para obter uma apresentao da imagem anterior ou da seguinte arraste


simplesmente a imagem actual no ecr com o dedo para a esquerda ou a
direita.

Coloque dois dedos no ecr tctil e estique-os para aumentar a imagem de


forma contnua. Se voltar a juntar os dedos, a imagem reduzida de forma
contnua. Toque brevemente e depois rapidamente duas vezes no ecr
tctil para aumentar a imagem automaticamente. Ao tocar novamente
duas vezes a imagem apresentada no seu tamanho original.
Tocando brevemente no ecr tctil ter vrias funes sua disposio.

Toque suavemente sobre o smbolo Men


, para visualizar
outras opes
possvel iniciar uma apresentao de slides, modificar as
imagens, girar, cortar, definir como pano de fundo e visualizar as
propriedades da imagem.
Toque sobre o smbolo da lixeira
selecionada.

, para cancelar a imagem

Toque sobre o smbolo encaminhar


por e-mail.

, para enviar a imagem

f) Msica
Toque brevemente no cone da msica no ecr inicial ou do resume das aplicaes para abrir a
reproduo de msica.
No seguinte resumo tem a possibilidade de obter uma listagem da sua msica por intrprete, lbum,
ttulo, playlist ou a reproduzir. Toque simplesmente breve no smbolo correspondente.
Intrpretes

Apresenta todos os ficheiros de msica ordenados pelos diversos


intrpretes.

lbuns

Apresenta todos os ficheiros de msica ordenados pelos lbuns.

Ttulo

Apresenta todos os ficheiros de msica ordenados pelos ttulos.

Playlists

Apresenta a playlist criada.

A reproduzir

Salta directamente para a msica a reproduzir.

Seleccione o ficheiro pretendido ao tocar brevemente no nome para iniciar a reproduo da msica.
PT - 13

Ecr de reproduo
(1) A reproduzir
(2) Activar / desactivar reproduo aleatria
(3) Opes de repetio:
a)
Repetir todos os ttulos
b)
Repetir ttulo actual
c)
Repetio desactivada
(4) Detalhe de ttulo
(5) Ttulo seguinte / anterior
(6) Play / Pausa
(7) Barra de tempo

Toque no smbolo da pausa


para parar a reproduo.
Para continuar a reproduo toque no smbolo Play .
Toque no smbolo para avanar ou retroceder /
para reproduzir o ttulo anterior ou o
seguinte.
Toque na posio na barra de tempo para continuar a reproduo directamente a partir da.
Utilize os botes +/- do volume ao lado do seu aparelho, para ajustar o volume.
Para abrir a previso da lista de reproduo actual toque no smbolo da reproduo . Toque
num ttulo para o reproduzir directamente.
Para alterar o modo de repetio toque no respectivo smbolo .
Para aceder ao ecro inicial toque brevemente na tecla Home
. A reproduo da msica no
interrompida. Sendo assim pode navegar por exemplo com o browser na internet e ouvir msica
simultaneamente. Toque simplesmente de novo no cone da msica para voltar reproduo
da msica.

No modo de reproduo pode efectuar vrias definies. Toque brevemente em menu

Biblioteca visualiza-se um resumo de todos os ficheiros de msica disponveis.


Party Shuffle activar ou desactivar o modo Party Shuffle.
Adicionar Playlist adicionar o ttulo a reproduzir actualmente a uma playlist.
Apagar apagar o ttulo a reproduzir actualmente.
Efeitos de som definir um efeito de som para a reproduo da msica.

g) Vdeo
Toque brevemente no cone do vdeo no ecr inicial ou no resumo das aplicaes para abrir a
reproduo de vdeo.
Visualiza-se ento uma lista dos ficheiros de vdeo. Seleccione o ficheiro pretendido tocando brevemente
para assim iniciar o vdeo.

PT - 14

h) App Center
O AndroidPIT App Center est pr-instalado neste aparelho. Aqui poder encontrar vrias Apps,
relatrios de testes, um blog e um frum.
Para mais informaes ou ajuda na utilizao do App Center visite a pgina web do operador sob
www.androidpit.de.
Nota: Esta funo requer uma ligao WLAN Internet..

i) Web Browser
Para iniciar o Web Browser toque no cone do browser
no ecr principal.
Insira o endereo de internet no campo superior de entradas para abrir uma pgina da internet. Surge
ento o teclado virtual para assim poder inserir o endereo da pgina pretendida na internet. Toque em
comear ou no smbolo da seta ao lado do campo de entradas para abrir a pgina da internet.
Nota: Nem todas as redes fornecem o acesso internet. Algumas redes oferecem apenas o acesso a outros computadores
conectados a nvel local, mas no uma ligao internet.

Utilizao do teclado virtual


Toque no campo de entradas para aceder ao teclado virtual. Pode ento inserir textos ou aceder a
pginas da internet.
a. Caps Lock (letras maisculas ou minsculas)
b. Tecla para voltar
c. Aceder ao menu para os nmeros, sinais e entradas
de smbolos
d. Space Taste (espao)
e. comear ( confirmar a sua entrada)

Inserir smbolos
Para digitar smbolos especiais, como por exemplo , toque por alguns segundos com seus dedos
sobre a letra a, que aparecer o menu dos smbolos especiais. Deslize o dedo sobre o smbolo
desejado, por exemplo, o e leve-o novamente do display, Assim, o foi introduzido.

PT - 15

Utilizao do Web Browser

Pode deslocar-se pela visualizao no ecr se efectuar um movimento vertical com o seu dedo. Por
favor no inicie o movimento num ponto no menu ou num link, pois pode abrir o atalho existente.
Para abrir um link na internet toque simplesmente no link. A pgina nova abre automaticamente.
Para abrir o menu do Web Browser, clique sobre o teclado menu
. Sero visualizadas vrias
funes. Entre elas, possvel atualizar pginas Web abertas, abrir um novo Tab, ler as pginas
Web off-line ou mudar as configuraes do Web Browser.
Para voltar pgina anterior prima em voltar
.
Para voltar directamente ao ecr inicial prima em Home
.
Para inserir um texto toque no campo correspondente e utilize o teclado virtual para inserir o texto.

Nota: Esta funo requer uma ligao WLAN Internet.

j) Resumo das aplicaes


Toque brevemente no cone do resumo das aplicaes para abrir o resumo das aplicaes. Visualiza
ento um resumo de todas as aplicaes pr-instaladas e anteriormente instaladas por si. Abra a
aplicao pretendida tocando brevemente no cone correspondente.

Resumo das aplicaes

k) Configuraes do sistema
Clique no menu das aplicaes sobre o cone de configurao, para ativar a configurao do sistema.

No lado esquerdo do menu esto as localizadas as categorias. Clicando levemente no respectivo


menu, ir apareceras possibilidades de configurao disponveis. Considere que, eventualmente,
nem todas as funes do Androidso compatveis com este aparelho.
Quando todas as configuraes tiverem sido completadas, com a tecla Voltar
possvel tornar
ao ltimo menu executado, ou com a tecla Home
voltar diretamente para a tela principal .As
alteraes feitas sero salvadas automaticamente.

PT - 16

Resumo das configuraes

Sem fios & redes

Wi-Fi

Para configurar sua rede Wi-Fi.

Outros

Outras possibilidades de configurao de rede.


Ajustar o volume desejado e o tom de comunicao desejado.
Tambm possvel ativar e desativar umtoque de confirmao tocando o
Touchscreen e um toque de notificao para bloquear e desbloquear o
display.

Som

Display

automtico do display girando o aparelho.


Stand-by Ajustar o retardamento para desligar o display automaticamente.
Tamanho dos carcteres Ajustar o tamanho dos caracteres.

Aparelho

Usurio

Sistema

Brilho Ajustar o nvel do brilho da tela.


Imagem de fundo Lista de possveis imagens de fundo.
Girar display automaticamente Ligar e desligar o sensor de orientao

Memria

Informaes sobre a memria interna e -caso esteja disponvel- do carto


de memria Micro SD. sempre possvel cancelar o contedo da memria.

Bateria

Informaes sobre o atual nvel da bateria interna.

Aplicaes

Possibilidades de administrar as aplicaes instaladas e obter informaes


sobre as aplicaes.

Contas &
sincronizao

Definir se e com qual frequncia as contas estabelecidas devem ser


sincronizadas.

Servio local

Possibilidade de aceitar diversos aplicativos Android, verificar o nvel atual


de sinal de rede e utilizar a rede (p.ex. Google Maps). possvel
estabelecer se os resultados de busca do Google e outros servios se
adaptam nesta localizao.

Segurana

Ativar e desativar o bloqueio e da tela e outras configuraes relevantes


segurana.

Idioma & Teclado

Seleciona o idioma preferido, adiciona ou edita novas palavras no dicionrio


pessoal e configura as opes do teclado na tela.

Salvar &
Reposio

Salvar as configuraes do sistema e os dados de aplicaes em servidores


Google. possvel estabelecer a reposio dos dados de fbrica.
ATENO: Todos os dados salvos no aparelho sero perdidos.

Data & Hora

Ajusta a data, o relgio interno, o fuso horrio e seleciona o formato de


apresentao.

Sobre o Tablet

Informaes sobre o aparelho.

PT - 17

10.) Enviar / receber emails


A aplicao de email est pr-instalada neste aparelho. Esta aplicao permite-lhe utilizar o seu actual
endereo para enviar e receber emails.
Nota: Esta funo requer uma ligao WLAN Internet.

Abra a aplicao atravs do cone email no menu das aplicaes.

Instalar a conta de e-mail


(1) Inicie a aplicao de email tocando no smbolo de email. Ser convidado/a a instalar a sua conta de
email.
(2) Insira o seu endereo de email e a respectiva palavra-passe e toque em continuar. A seguir insira
um nome para a sua conta e defina o nome apresentado para as mensagens enviadas. Toque em
terminar para concluir a configurao. A sua conta de email ser seleccionada como conta geral
se seleccionar a opo enviar emails por defeito desde esta conta.
(3) Tambm pode instalar a sua conta de email manualmente. Insira o seu endereo de email e a
respectiva palavra-passe e toque em Configurao manual para inserir as informaes do
servidor de email.
(4) Seleccione um dos tipos de servidores POP3, IMAP ou Exchange para a recepo de emails.
Nota: Se no tiver a certeza quais as configuraes a efectuar, contacte os fornecedores de servios de email, o seu administrador
de rede ou pesquise na internet por palavras-chave, tais como endereo POP e nome do seu fornecedor de servios para obter
as informaes requeridas.

(5) Insira as informaes requeridas (servidor, porta, etc.).

(6) Seleccione o tipo de servidor para emails a enviar e insira as informaes requeridas.
(7) Toque em continuar para continuar com o menu. A aplicao de email verifica ento as
configuraes do servidor efectuadas. Concluda com sucesso a instalao visualiza-se a
mensagem Your account is set up, and email is on its way. A sua conta est configurada.
(8) Insira um nome para a sua conta e toque em terminar para concluir o processo.
Nota: Caso possua mais de uma conta de email, ter acesso conta geral sempre que iniciar a aplicao de email

PT - 18

Gerenciando uma conta E-mail


Adicionando uma nova conta:
(1) Abra a aplicao de E-Mail e clique sobre a tecla menu
para mostrar outras opes. Escolha
configurao e depois acrescentar conta, para adicionar um novo endereo.
(2) Siga as instrues de configurao, para adicionar um novo endereo.

Cancelar um endereo:
(1) Abra a aplicao de E-Mail e clique sobre a tecla menu
para mostrar outras opes. Selecione o
ponto "configurao" e depois cancelar conta, para cancelar o endereo desejado.

Verificando as propriedades da conta:


(1) Abra a aplicao de E-Mail e clique sobre a tecla menu
para mostrar outras opes e selecione
configurao. No lado esquerdo do menu ir aparecer, ento, todos os endereos ativados.
(2) Clique sobre o endereo desejado, para visualizar as propriedades da conta.
(3) Clique sobre propriedades da conta, para completar os registros.

Ver mensagens de e-mail


Abra a aplicao de email tocando brevemente no cone de email para ver a conta de email criada.
Um movimento vertical permite-lhe deslocar-se pelos seus emails.
Toque brevemente num email que pretende abrir.
Mantenha o dedo numa mensagem de email para ver mais opes. Surge uma mensagem de
informaes. Ento pode abrir, responder, reencaminhar ou apagar emails.

Escrever mensagens via e-mail


(1) Clique no smbolo de E-mail na barra superior do menu e se abrir uma nova janela, onde poder
escrever um e-mail.
(2) Escreva o endereo de e-mail do destinatrio, um objeto e o texto nas respectivas lacunas.
tambm possvel adicionar Cc/Bcc, para escrever um e-mail a mais de um destinatrio.
(3) Clique sobre enviar, para enviar o e-mail. Clique sobre salvar, para salvar o e-mail digitado como
rascunho. Se clicar sobre o smbolo lixeira, o e-mail apenas digitado ser cancelado.

PT - 19

11.) Gerir aplicaes


Aplicaes pr-instaladas
Este aparelho fornecido com aplicaes pr-instaladas. O resumo das aplicaes
mostra um
resumo sobre as aplicaes anteriormente instaladas. Entre elas esto o Video Player, Audio Player,
Internet Browser, o alarme, a calculadora e outros mais. Para abrir uma dessas aplicaes toque
brevemente no respectivo cone.

Instalar aplicaes
Para instalar aplicaes no aparelho siga os seguintes passos:
(1) Descarregue a software (tal como Androidpit Market). Assegure-se de que se trata de um ficheiro
APK.
(2) Caso tenha descarregado os ficheiros para o seu computador, conecte o aparelho atravs do cabo
USB com o seu computador e copie os ficheiros para a memria interna.
(3) Desconecte o aparelho do computador e abra o Explorer para abrir os ficheiros copiados.
(4) Siga as instrues de instalao no ecr para instalar a aplicao.
(5) Concluda a instalao com sucesso a aplicao encontra-se no menu das aplicaes.

Desinstalar aplicaes
(1) Abra configurao do sistema clicando rpido sobre o cone de configurao na lista de aplicaes.
(2) Clique rapidamente no menu Apps, para entrar na configurao das aplicaes.
(3) Selecione entre um dos pontos fazer um download, dispositivo de memria USB, ativo e todos
com um leve toque a aplicao desejada.
(4) Ento, selecione clicando rapidamente sobre a aplicao que deve ser desinstalada.
(5) Clique sobre desinstalar e confirme com um OK, para que a aplicao seja desinstalada do
aparelho.

Nota: No possvel de apagar software pr-instalada.

PT - 20

12.) Gestor de ficheiros


Abra a vista geral de aplicaes e, em seguida, toque brevemente no cone Gestor de ficheiros, para
iniciar o gestor de ficheiros.

Navegar por ficheiros e pastas

Pode escolher entre a memria interna, o carto de memria (se inserido no Tablet), USB (se
conetada ao Tablet), assim como todos os ficheiros de imagens disponveis e todos os ficheiros de
vdeo. Toque no local de memria pretendido para visualizar os ficheiros a includos como
lista, ou selecione o cone para os ficheiros de imagens ou de vdeo, para visualizar todos os
ficheiros deste tipo.
Ao fazer deslizar o dedo na vertical agora possvel percorrer os ficheiros e as pastas. Abra um
ficheiro ou uma pasta mediante um toque breve.

Pode retroceder um passo

, tocando brevemente no respetivo cone.

Utilizar a barra de ferramentas

Mudar diretamente para o diretrio principal.

Memria interna

Carto micro SD (se inserido no Tablet)

Memria USB (se conetada ao Tablet)

Indica todas as imagens disponveis

Indica todos os vdeos disponveis

Aqui pode visualizar todos os processos em curso.

Editor: Aqui pode colar ficheiros (paste), apagar, criar ou mover


uma cpia. Toque sobre o ficheiro pretendido e surgir uma
seta verde antes do nome do ficheiro. A seguir, selecione a
funo pretendida.
PT - 21

Copiar, mover e mudar o nome de ficheiros e pastas


1.)
2.)
3.)
4.)

5.)
6.)

Navegue at ao ficheiro pretendido na vista geral de ficheiros.


Toque e mantenha o dedo sobre o ficheiro, at surgir um campo de informao.
Selecione agora a funo pretendida. Pode escolher entre Apagar ficheiro (Delete file), Mudar
o nome do ficheiro, Copiar o ficheiro e Mover o ficheiro (Move File),
Para copiar ou mover, toque brevemente no respetivo cone (Copy / Move) e navegue, em
seguida, para o diretrio alvo. A seguir, toque no cone Editor
e, ao premir
brevemente em Paste, selecione colar o ficheiro.
Para apagar um ficheiro, toque em Delete e, como segurana, confirme novamente com
apagar. Para interromper toque brevemente em cancelar.
Para Mudar o nome de um ficheiro, toque em Mudar o nome do ficheiro e, em seguida,
indique o novo nome do ficheiro atravs do teclado virtual. Confirme a entrada com mudar
o nome ou interrompa o processo com cancelar.

13.) Ler documentos de Office


A aplicao Office Suite para ler documentos de Office est pr-instalada neste aparelho. Pode assim
ler ficheiros em Word, Excel, ou Powerpoint.
1.)
2.)
3.)
4.)

Copiar os ficheiros de Office para o aparelho.


Abrir a aplicao Office Suite.
Navegar com o Explorer para o ficheiro pretendido.
Seleccionar o ficheiro pretendido tocando brevemente nele. Movimentar o dedo vertical e
horizontalmente sobre o ecr para virar pginas individuais. Tocar brevemente no menu para
abrir mais opes. Pode pesquisar por exemplo um texto especfico ou contar palavras.

PT - 22

14.) Task Manager


Este aparelho de Multitasking. Assim sendo pode abrir vrias aplicaes simultaneamente, tal como
ouvir msica e navegar ao mesmo tempo na internet ou ver fotografias.
Pode surgir o caso de que decorram demasiadas aplicaes de fundo. Nesse caso abra a aplicao
Task Killer e termine as aplicaes que no so necessrias no momento.
(1)

Abrir a aplicaoTask Killer.

(3)

Para confirmar toque brevemente no smbolo

(2)

Seleccionar as aplicaes que no


so necessrias no momento.

Kill selected apps.

15.) Condies de garantia limitada


A garantia cobre apenas a substituio deste produto da Intenso. A garantia no vlida em caso de
desgastes normais resultantes de uso inadequado, negligncia, acidentes, incompatibilidade ou rendimento
insuficiente de um certa hardware ou software de computador.
O direito a garantia expira em caso de no-cumprimento com o manual de instrues da Intenso, bem como
em caso de montagem e uso indevido ou defeitos causados por outros aparelhos.
Caso o produto esteja sujeito a vibraes, descargas electrostticas, influncias de calor ou humidade que
no estejam incluidas nas especificaes do produto, no tem direito a garantia.
A Intenso no se responsabiliza por perda de dados ou danos colaterais ou subsequentes, pela violao
das condies de garantia ou outros danos independente das suas causas.
Este produto no se destina ao uso comercial ou a nvel medicinal ou especial, nos quais uma falha do
produto pode causar leses, mortes ou elevados danos materiais.

PT - 23

16.) Dados tcnicos


CPU
Memria
Sistema operativo
Sistemas operativos
compatveis
Possibilidades de conectar
WLAN
G-Sensor
Formato de fotografia
Formato de audio
Formato de vdeo
Ecr
Cmara
SNR
Area de frequncia
Transformador
Bateria integrada

1 GHz Cortex A8
512 MB DDR 3
Android 4.0.4
Windows XP / Vista / 7 / Linux 2,4 e superior / Mac 10.6 e superior
Auriculares, Micro SD (SDHC), Micro USB
WiFi (802.11 b/g/n)
Rotao em 360 graus
JPEG, BMP, GIF, PNG
MP3, WMA, WAV, OGG, FLAC, APE
MPEG1, MPEG 4, FLV
TFT LCD Display, 800 x 480 Pixel
0,3 MP cmara na frente
>= 80 dB
20 Hz 20 KHz
Adaptador (V) AC (Ktec KSAS0100500200HE): AC Input 100240V50/60Hz, DC Output 5V / 2A
Bateria recarregvel de ies-litio de polmero

17.) Manuteno do aparelho


Nunca borrife ou aplique no ecr ou na caixa do aparelho algum lquido.

18.) Limpeza do aparelho


Limpe a caixa, a armao e o ecr com um pano macio que no largue plos e
que no contenha produtos qumicos. Utilize apenas detergentes especiais
para o ecr.

19.) Eliminao de aparelhos electrnicos fora de uso


Aparelhos identificados com este smbolo esto sujeitos Directiva
Europeia 2002/96/EC.
Todos os equipamentos elctricos e electrnicos devem ser
separados do lixo domstico e eliminados pelas respectivas
instituies pblicas.
A eliminao devida de equipamentos electrnicos evita a poluio
do ambiente.

PT - 24

20.) Licena informao


Notice of GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE and LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENCE
Dear Customer,
If interested, you and any third party can download the source code of used GPL / LGPL from Intenso
Webpage http://www.intenso.de . The source code of the desired product is available to anyone on the
selection of valid product category and the desired device. In the product details you will find the entry
"drivers". Open this menu to download the corresponding GPL / LGPL code. For a fee of 35 (delivery to
another country as Germany), it is also possible to obtain this code by postal delivery. More information
about the GPL/LGPL-Licence can you nd on following website www.gnu.org
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast,
the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software-to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free
Software Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other
Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Lesser General Public License instead.) You can
apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are
designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this
service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the
software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you
to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of
the software, or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the
recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code.
And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives
you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.
Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is
no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its
recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not
reflect on the original authors' reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that
redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program
proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use
or not licensed at all.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder
saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below, refers to
any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" means either the Program or any derivative
work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or
with modifications and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without
limitation in the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you".
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside
its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if
its contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made by running the
Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any
PT - 25

medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright
notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of
any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty
protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the
Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided
that you also meet all of these conditions:
a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the
date of any change.
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from
the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of
this License.
c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when started
running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an
appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a
warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the user how to
view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an
announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not
derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as
separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the
Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other
licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you;
rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on
the Program.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work
based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under
the scope of this License.
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or
executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed
under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge no
more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the
corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium
customarily used for software interchange; or,
c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code.
(This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object
code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an
executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the
executable. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is
normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on)
of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the
executable.
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then
offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source
code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this
License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will
automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights,
from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full
compliance.
5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants
you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by
PT - 26

law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based
on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for
copying, distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it.
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatically
receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms
and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted
herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License.
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not
limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise)
that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If
you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other
pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a
patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies
directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance
of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to
contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free
software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made
generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent
application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software
through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this
License.
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by
copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an
explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in
or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in
the body of this License.
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public License
from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this
License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions
either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does
not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free
Software Foundation.
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are
different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software
Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will
be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of
promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE
PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE
STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE
PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE,
YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY
COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE
PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL,
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO
USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED
INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE
PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER
PT - 27

PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.


END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way
to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source
file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the "copyright"
line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
one line to give the program's name and an idea of what it does.
Copyright (C) yyyy name of author
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
GNU General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode:
Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author
Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details
type `show w'. This is free software, and you are welcome
to redistribute it under certain conditions; type `show c'
for details.
The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate parts of the General Public
License. Of course, the commands you use may be called something other than `show w' and `show c'; they
could even be mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a "copyright
disclaimer" for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright
interest in the program `Gnomovision'
(which makes passes at compilers) written
by James Hacker.
signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1989
Ty Coon, President of Vice

PT - 28

Intenso GmbH
Data:12 de julho de 2013

Declarao de conformidade CE
Ns, a Intenso GmbH,
com sede em Diepholzer Str. 15, 49377 Vechta, Alemanha
declaramos sob a nossa responsabilidade que o produto:
Modelo: 7 TAB 714 (N de artigo 5509852)
Descrio: Tablet PC
se encontra em conformidade com as seguintes diretivas e normas:
Diretiva R&TTE 1999/5/EG
EN 301 489-1 V1.9.2
EN 301 489-17 V2.1.1
EN 300 328 V1.7.1 : 2006-10
EN 55022:2010 (Class B)
EN 55024:2010
EN 61000-3-2:2006+A1 :2009+A2 :2009 (Class D)
EN 61000-3-3:2008
Diretiva de baixa tenso 2006/95/EG
EN 60950-1:2006+A11:2009+A1:2010+A12:2011+A12: correo 2012
Diretiva de Eco-Design 2009/125/EG
1275/2008
278/2009
Diretiva de ROHS 2011/65/EU
Os documentos tcnicos relativos ao aparelho acima especificado, esto arquivados no seguinte
local:
Intenso GmbH
Diepholzer Str. 15, 49377 Vechta, Alemanha
Pessoa autorizada:

____________________________
Gerente: Thomas Phlking
PT - 29

Instrukcja obsugi TAB 714


Serdecznie dzikujemy za decyzj o korzystaniu z TAB714 firmy Intenso. Prosimy o zapoznanie si z
t instrukcj, aby uzyska informacje o najwaniejszych funkcjach tego urzdzenia.

1.) Spis treci


1.) Spis treci .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 1
2.) Ostrzeenia ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 2
3.) Widok oglny urzdzenia....................................................................................................................................................................... 4
4.) Zawarto opakowania .......................................................................................................................................................................... 4
5.) adowanie akumulatora......................................................................................................................................................................... 5
6.) Korzystanie z karty micro SD/SDHC...................................................................................................................................................... 5
7.) Przenoszenie danych pomidzy urzdzeniem a komputerem ............................................................................................................... 5
8.) Ekran dotykowy ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 6
9.) Ekran startowy ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 7
Widok .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7
Odblokowywanie wywietlacza ................................................................................................................................................................... 7
Dopasowanie ekranu startowego ................................................................................................................................................................ 8
Uywanie rnych ekranw startowych ...................................................................................................................................................... 9
Zainstalowane fabrycznie aplikacje na ekranie startowym.......................................................................................................................... 9
a) pasek wyszukiwania Google ............................................................................................................................................................ 10
b) Przegld aplikacji .................................................................................................................................................................................. 10
c) Pogoda ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 11
d) WIFI ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 11
Poczenie automatyczne ......................................................................................................................................................................... 11
Pocznie rczne ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 12
e) Galeria .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 12
f) Muzyka .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 13
g) Wideo ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 14
h) App Center ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 15
i) Przegldarka internetowa ...................................................................................................................................................................... 15
Korzystanie z wirtualnej klawiatury ........................................................................................................................................................... 15
Wprowadzanie znakw specjalnych ......................................................................................................................................................... 16
Korzystanie z przegldarki internetowej.................................................................................................................................................... 16
j) Przegld aplikacji ................................................................................................................................................................................... 17
k) Ustawienia systemowe ......................................................................................................................................................................... 17
Przegld ustawie .................................................................................................................................................................................... 18
10.) Wysyanie / odbieranie wiadomoci e-mail ........................................................................................................................................ 19
Konfigurowanie skrzynki e-mail ................................................................................................................................................................ 19
Zarzdzanie kontami e-mail ...................................................................................................................................................................... 20
Wywietlanie wiadomoci e-mail .............................................................................................................................................................. 20
Pisanie wiadomoci e-mail........................................................................................................................................................................ 20
11.) Zarzdzanie aplikacjami .................................................................................................................................................................... 21
Instalacja aplikacji ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 21
Odinstalowywanie aplikacji ....................................................................................................................................................................... 21
12.) Menader plikw ................................................................................................................................................................................ 22
Nawigacja pomidzy plikami i folderami ................................................................................................................................................... 22
Uywanie paska narzdzi ......................................................................................................................................................................... 22
Kopiowanie, przenoszenie i zmiana nazwy pliku i folderu......................................................................................................................... 23
13.) Przegldanie dokumentw Office ...................................................................................................................................................... 23
14.) Menader zada ................................................................................................................................................................................ 24
15.) Warunki ograniczonej gwarancji ........................................................................................................................................................ 24
16.) Dane techniczne ................................................................................................................................................................................ 25
17.) Konserwacja urzdzenia.................................................................................................................................................................... 25
18.) Czyszczenie urzdzenia .................................................................................................................................................................... 25
19.) Utylizacja zuytych urzdze elektrycznych ...................................................................................................................................... 25
20.) Licencja informacja ............................................................................................................................................................................ 26
Deklaracja zgodnoci UE............................................................................................................................................................................... 30

PL - 1

Niniejsza instrukcja moe nie zawiera opisu wszystkich funkcji Twojego urzdzenia. W przypadku korzystania z aplikacji
zewntrznych dostawcw, w celu uzyskania informacji prosimy o kontakt z danym dostawc. Prosimy pamita, e wszystkie
dane mog zosta zmienione bez wczeniejszego powiadomienia. Aktualne informacje mona znale na stronie
www.intenso.de
Znaki firmowe
Google, logo Google i Android s markami firmy Google. Wszystkie inne nazwy produktw i usug s wasnoci
swoich wacicieli.

2.) Ostrzeenia

Naley unika mocnego uderzania urzdzenia. Nie naley ka urzdzenia na pochyych


powierzchniach, aby unikn upadku urzdzenia.

Nie naley uywa urzdzenia w warunkach bardzo niskich lub wysokich temperatur, wysokiej
wilgotnoci lub zapylenia. Nie naley rwnie naraa urzdzenia na bezporednie
promieniowanie soneczne.

Naley unika uywania w zapiaszczonych miejscach.

Nie uywa urzdzenia w miejscach zagroenia wybuchowego, np. przy dystrybutorach paliwa
na stacjach paliw.

Naley unika uywania na poduszkach, sofach i innych przedmiotach, ktre wspomagaj


wytwarzanie ciepa, poniewa istnieje wtedy niebezpieczestwo przegrzania urzdzenia.

Naley czsto przeprowadza zabezpieczanie danych, aby unikn moliwej utraty danych. Nie
odpowiadamy za ewentualn utrat danych.

Nie przerywa poczenia podczas przesyania danych lub formatowania urzdzenia. Moe to
prowadzi do utraty danych.

Zdjcia i filmy mog by chronione prawami autorskimi osb trzecich. Odtwarzanie bez
posiadania licencji moe by naruszeniem praw autorskich.

Naley unika uywania w mocnym polu magnetycznym.

Naley chroni urzdzenie przed wilgoci. Jeli wilgo przedostanie si do urzdzenia, naley je
bezzwocznie wyczy, nastpnie oczyci i wysuszy.

Do czyszczenia urzdzenia nie uywa roztworw chemicznych. Prosz uywa wycznie


suchej szmatki.
W pobliu lub na urzdzeniu nie umieszcza otwartego ognia, np. wiec.

Nie odpowiadamy za szkody powstae w wyniku wadliwego dziaania, utraty danych,


nieprawidowej obsugi, samodzielnych napraw urzdzenia lub wymiany akumulatora.

Jeli urzdzenie przestao reagowa na prby wprowadzania polece, naley uy znajdujcy


si z tyu urzdzenia przycisk Reset, aby je ponownie uruchomi.

W przypadku nieuywania prosz odczy zasilacz od rda zasilania.

Gniazdko sieciowe musi znajdowa si w pobliu urzdzenia i by atwo dostpne.

PL - 2

Zasilacz naley podcza wycznie do uziemionych gniazdek sieciowych o napiciu AC 100240V~, 50/60 Hz. Jeli nie jeste pewny parametrw prdu w miejscu, w ktrych korzystasz z
urzdzenia, to skontaktuj si z odpowiednim dostawc prdu.

Naley korzysta wycznie z zaczonego zasilacza i przewodu sieciowego.

Aby przerwa zasilanie urzdzenia, naley wyj zasilacz z gniazdka sieciowego. Podczas
wycigania naley zawsze chwyta bezporednio zasilacz. Nigdy nie cign za przewd.

Nie otwiera obudowy zasilacza. Otwarta obudowa stwarza zagroenie dla ycia powodowane
poraeniem elektrycznym. Zasilacz nie zawiera czci podlegajcych konserwacji.

Podczas dusze nieuywania akumulator urzdzenie powoli si rozadowuje. Przed ponownym


uyciem konieczne jest jego ponowne naadowanie.

Prosz zwrci uwag na niestanowic zagroenia dla rodowiska utylizacj urzdzenia lub
akumulatora.

Prosz nie rozbiera urzdzenia na podzespoy, ani nie prbowa go samodzielnie naprawia,
gdy w takim przypadku wygasa gwarancja.

Nie uywa urzdzenia w miejscach, w ktrych obowizuje zakaz uywania urzdze


przenonych. Nie uywa urzdzenia w pobliu innych urzdze elektronicznych, gdy w
wyniku sygnaw wysokiej czstotliwoci moe doj do zakce.

Nie uywa urzdzenia w pobliu rozrusznikw serca, w szpitalach lub w pobliu urzdze
medycznych, poniewa w wyniku sygnaw wysokiej czstotliwoci moe doj do zakce.
Naley utrzymywa odstp min. 15 cm od rozrusznikw serca. Prosz zwrci si do
producentw tych urzdze, aby uzyska informacje dotyczce jednoczesnego ich uywania.

Podczas uywania suchawek o zbyt wysokiej gonoci moe doj do trwaego uszkodzenia
suchu.

Ze wzgldu na bezpieczestwo ruchu podczas jazdy urzdzenie nie moe by obsugiwane


przez osob prowadzc pojazd.

PL - 3

3.) Widok oglny urzdzenia

1.)Przycisk W./WY.: Przycisn dugo,


aby wyczy urzdzenie, przycisn
krtko, aby zmienia pomidzy trybami
czuwania i pracy
2.)Gniazdo suchawek 3,5mm

5.)Gniazdo karty micro SD


6.)Gono +/7.)Ekran dotykowy
8.)Kamera przednia

3.)Gniazdo micro USB


4.)Wejcie zasilania DC 5V 2A

4.) Zawarto opakowania


Prosz sprawdzi kompletno zawartoci opakowania:

TAB 714
suchawki stereo
przewd USB
zasilacz 5V 2.0A
Instrukcja obsugi
USB Dongle

PL - 4

5.) adowanie akumulatora


Prosz przed pierwszy uyciem cakowicie naadowa akumulator urzdzenia. W tym celu naley
poczy zaczony zasilacz z urzdzeniem i gniazdem sieciowym. Pene adowanie trwa ok. 5 godzin.
Stan naadowania wywietlany jest z przodu, po prawej stronie urzdzenia.
Stan naadowania jest wywietlany podczas pracy w listwie statusu. Przy aktywowanej blokadzie
wywietlacza stan naadowania wywietlany jest procentowo.
Jeli urzdzenie jest wyczone, to po krtkim naciniciu dowolnego przycisku wywietlony zostanie na
wywietlaczu symbol baterii. Podczas adowania za pomoc animacji wywietlany jest w kilku poziomach
proces napeniania akumulatora. Kiedy akumulator jest w peni naadowany, to animacja si koczy i bateria
wywietlana jest w caoci.

Wskazwki:
a. Przy 15% pozostajcej mocy akumulatora na wywietlaczu pojawi si ostrzeenie. W takiej sytuacji powinno si podczy
urzdzenie poprzez zasilacz z gniazdkiem sieciowym w celu naadowania akumulatora, aby unikn ewentualnej utraty danych i
podnie ywotno akumulatora.
b. Z urzdzenia mona korzysta podczas adowania akumulatora. Aby zachowa jak najdusz ywotno akumulatora, prosimy o
nie korzystanie z urzdzenia.
c. Aby zapewni jak najlepsz wydajno, konieczne jest czste korzystanie z wbudowanego akumulatora. Jeli urzdzenie jest
rzadko uywane, to prosz przynajmniej raz w miesicu w peni naadowa akumulator.
d. Naley zapewni, e uywany jest wycznie dostarczony z urzdzeniem zasilacz.

6.) Korzystanie z karty micro SD/SDHC


Urzdzenie to moe odczytywa dane bezporednio z karty micro SD/SDHC.
Aby uywa karty micro SD/SDHC, naley woy kart w przeznaczone do tego gniazdo znajdujce si na
na spodzie urzdzenia (l). Aby mie dostp do znajdujcych si na karcie pamici danych naley
uywazainstalowanego Eksploratora (wicej na temat mona znale w penej instrukcji obsugi). W
tym celu naley w Eksploratorze wybra folder SD Card.

7.) Przenoszenie danych pomidzy urzdzeniem a komputerem


1.) Urzdzenie poczy za pomoc zaczonego przewodu USB z komputerem.
2.) Na urzdzeniu wywietlony zostanie ekran poczenia USB. Naley krtko nacisn na Aktywowanie
pamici USB. Urzdzenie zostanie rozpoznane jako wymienny nonik pamici i wywietlona
zostanie informacja Pami USB w uyciu. Po krtkim naciniciu na przycisk Home mona
normalnie korzysta z urzdzenia. Teraz posiadasz dostp ze swojego komputera do wewntrznej
pamici urzdzenia i moesz kopiowa, usuwa lub przenosi pliki na urzdzenie.
3.) Jeli istnieje poczenie USB z komputerem, to w pasku stanu wywietla si symbol USB. W
rozszerzonym pasku stanu (aby otworzy naley krtko nacisn na zegar) wywietlane s dodatkowe
informacje oraz mona aktywowa wzgl. deaktywowa poczenie USB.

PL - 5

Aby deaktywowa nonik danych, naley wybra opcj Deaktywuj pami USB.

Na komputerze naley wybra funkcj Bezpieczne usuwanie


komputera.

, aby odczy urzdzenie od

Wskazwka: Fabrycznie zainstalowane aplikacje oraz system operacyjny Android zajmuj cz zainstalowanej pamici
wewntrznej konieczne jest ok. 1 GB pamici. Z tego powodu do dyspozycji nie jest dostpna cao wewntrznej pamici.

8.) Ekran dotykowy


Urzdzenie jest sterowane za pomoc ekranu dotykowego. Delikatnie naciskajc palcem na ekran
dotykowy mona bardzo atwo uruchamia aplikacje, wpisywa teksty za pomoc wirtualnej klawiatury
i przez przesuwanie palcem w odpowiednim kierunku przecza pomidzy pojedynczymi ekranami
startowymi.
Prosz usun foli ochronn wywietlacza przed uyciem urzdzenia.
Ekran dotykowy rozpoznaje drobne adunki elektryczne, jak na przykad te przekazywane przez ludzki
palec i ustala w ten sposb punkt wprowadzania.
Do wprowadzania najlepiej wic uywa opuszkw palcw. Obsuga za pomoc pisaka lub innego ostro
zakoczonego przedmiotu jest niemoliwa.
Ekran dotykowy nie powinien mie kontaktu z wod lub innymi urzdzeniami elektrycznymi, aby unikn
bdnego dziaania i trwaych uszkodze.
Wskazwki:
a.
Jeli ekran dotykowy nie jest obsugiwany przez dwie minuty, to urzdzenie przechodzi w tryb czuwania. Aby przej w tryb
aktywny, naley krtko nacisn przycisk W./WY.
b.
Aby uniemoliwi niezamierzone wprowadzanie, aktywowana jest automatyczny blokada przyciskw. Blokad prosz odblokowa
na ekranie dotykowym. Dotknij na wywietlaczu zamknitej kdki
wanie wywietlon otwart kdk

i przytrzymaj j nacinit. Przecignij teraz t kdk na

i nastpnie cofnij swj palec z wywietlacza. Ekran jest teraz odblokowany.

Urzdzenie mona obraca we wszystkie strony. Jest ono wyposaono w czujnik, ktry automatycznie
dostosowuje wywietlacz.

PL - 6

9.) Ekran startowy


Widok

Odblokowywanie wywietlacza
Jeli ekran dotykowy nie jest obsugiwany przez dwie minuty, to urzdzenie przechodzi w tryb czuwania.
Aby przej w tryb aktywny, naley krtko nacisn przycisk W./WY. Wywietlacz jest zablokowany w
celu ochrony przed niezamierzonym wprowadzaniem. Dotknij na wywietlaczu zamknitej kdki
i
przytrzymaj j nacinit. Przecignij teraz t kdk na wanie wywietlon otwart kdk
i
nastpnie cofnij swj palec z wywietlacza. Ekran jest teraz odblokowany.

Pocignij palcem symbol kdki zgodnie z kierunkiem strzaki.

Wskazwka: Przecignij symbol kdki na wywietlony symbol kamery, aby bezporednio otworzy aplikacj
aparatu fotograficznego.

PL - 7

Pasek stanu znajduje si w dolnym obszarze ekranu startowego. Ma on nastpujce funkcje:

Krok w ty

Uywane ostatnio
programy

Czas

Wywoywanie
Ekranu domowego

Wskanik baterii

Poczenie sieci
bezprzewodowej

Wywietlane s tutaj informacje o:

uywanych ostatnio programach


sile sygnau biecego poczenia z sieci bezprzewodow
aktualnym czasie
biecym stanie naadowania akumulatora

Mona wywoa nastpujce funkcje:

wywoa ekran startowy


w wywoanym menu cofn si o krok
uruchomi ostatnio uywane programy

Krtkim naciniciem na zegar otwiera si pasek stanu. Tutaj wywietlane s biece komunikaty
stanu. Ponowne nacinicie na zegar na rozwinitym pasku stanu powoduje wywietlenie przyciskw
szybkiego dostpu, jak na przykad dostp do ustawie.

Dopasowanie ekranu startowego


Ekran startowy mona bardzo atwo dopasowa do swoich indywidualnych potrzeb. Aby usun ikon,
naley troszk duej nacisn palcem na t ikon i przecign j do wywietlonego symbol X. Teraz
naley puci palec z ekranu dotykowego i ikona zostanie usunita.
Aby umieci ikon z przegldu aplikacji na ekranie startowym, naley nacisn w przegldzie
aplikacji troch duej na wybran ikon i wywietli si ekran startowy. Naley teraz przesun t ikon
na wybrane miejsce i puci palec z ekranu dotykowego. Ikona zostaa dodana do ekranu startowego.
Jeli na ikon pooy si inn ikon, to automatycznie zaoony zostanie folder zawierajcy obie ikony.
Nacinicie na folder powoduje wywietlenie wszystkich zawartych w nim ikon i umoliwia po przez krtkie
nacinicie wybr dowolnej ikony.
Ponadto mona do ekranu startowego mona doda widgety. W tym celu naley nacisn na przycisk
w grnym, prawym rogu ekranu startowego, aby otworzy menu aplikacji. Nastpnie naley nacisn na
sowo Widgety. Zostan teraz wywietlone wszystkie dostpne na urzdzeniu widgety. Dodawanie
widgeta na ekran startowy dziaa dokadnie tak, jak dodawanie ikony.
Aby zmieni to pulpitu, naley po prostu nacisn na wolne miejsce na ekranie startowym i przytrzyma
palec tak dugo na wywietlaczu, a wywietli si menu wyboru ta pulpitu.

PL - 8

Uywanie rnych ekranw startowych


Dostpnych jest pi ekranw startowych do indywidualnego skonfigurowania. Poprzez lekki ruch
przesunicia w lewo lub prawo mona bardzo atwo pomidzy nimi przecza.

Nacinicie przycisku Home powoduje automatyczny powrt do rodkowego ekranu startowego.

Zainstalowane fabrycznie aplikacje na ekranie startowym


Na ekranie startowym s ju fabrycznie zainstalowane rne aplikacje:
-

pasek wyszukiwania Google


pogoda
browser
muzyka
galeria
E-Mail
ustawie
AndroidPIT (App Center)

A Skrt klawiszowy wyszukiwania Google


B Przegld aplikacji
C wiatowa prognoza pogody
D Aplikacje na ekranie startowym
E Listwa stanu: Wstecz, Home, ostatnio
uywane programy, czas, WiFi, stan baterii

PL - 9

a) pasek wyszukiwania Google

Krtkie nacinicie na lup otwiera funkcj wyszukiwania Google. Za pomoc wirtualnej klawiatury
wprowad wybrane zapytanie i nacinij Szukaj. Wywietlone zostan dostpne wyniki wyszukiwania
Google.
Nacinicie na mikrofon, aktywuje wprowadzanie gosowe. Poszukiwane haso mona wprowadzi po
prostu wyranie mwic. Rozpoznawanie mowy wywietli rne moliwe hasa. Wskazanie wybranego
hasa przez krtkie nacinicie powoduje wywietlenie wynikw wyszukiwania w wyszukiwarce
Google.

Rada: Szybki ruch w gr lub w d, po ktrym palec puszcza ekran


dotykowy, powoduje szybkie przewijanie listy. Dziaa to przy wszystkich
oknach, ktre s wiksze ni wywietlacz.

Wskazwka: Ta funkcja wymaga poczenia poprzez sie bezprzewodow z Internetem.

b) Przegld aplikacji

Aby otworzy przegld aplikacji, naley nacisn ten symbol. Wywietlone zostan wszystkie zainstalowane
na urzdzeniu aplikacje. Nacinicie symbolu aplikacji pozwala na bezporednie uruchomienie wybranej
aplikacji.

PL - 10

c) Pogoda
Widget Pogoda wywietla jednoczenie ustawion aktualnie godzin, dat, pogod oraz temperatur dla
ustawionego miejsca.
Aby zmieni ustawienia, naley przej do przegldu aplikacji i nacisn na ikon Pogoda. Tutaj mona
dokona wybranych zmian.

Menu ustawie Pogoda


Wskazwka: Ta funkcja wymaga poczenia poprzez sie bezprzewodow z Internetem.

d) WIFI
Aby poczy urzdzenie z Internetem, konieczne jest poczenie z sieci bezprzewodow. Aby je
utworzy, naley nacisn na ikon Wi-Fi na gwnym ekranie, lub w Ustawieniach otworzy
Ustawienia Wi-Fi.
Wskazwka: Naley zwrci uwag, e w biecej pozycji konieczny jest zasig sieci bezprzewodowej.

Poczenie automatyczne
Uywajc ikony Wi-Fi lub korzystajc z Ustawie otwrz ustawienia Wi-Fi. Tutaj mona bardzo atwo
aktywowa i deaktywowa funkcj Wi-Fi. Przesu po prostu wirtualny przecznik z pozycji W. w
lewo, aby deaktywowa funkcj Wi-Fi. Wywietlacz przecza si teraz na Wy..
Aby deaktywowan funkcj Wi-Fi ponownie aktywowa, przesu po prostu wirtualny przecznik w
prawo.

W ustawieniach Wi-Fi po prawej stronie wywietlane s wszystkie dostpne sieci oraz wszystkie sieci, z
ktrych dotd korzystano.

PL - 11

Teraz naley nacisn na wybran sie i wprowadzi odpowiednie haso sieciowe, aby ustanowi
poczenie.

Potwierd ewentualnie wprowadzone haso naciskajc przycisk Enter i nacinij krtko na Pocz. Po
krtkiej chwili poczenie zostanie ustanowione.
Wskazwki:
a) Kiedy urzdzenie przechodzi w tryb czuwania, to poczenie z sieci bezprzewodow jest automatycznie deaktywowane.
Ogranicza to zuycie prdu i prowadzi w ten sposb automatycznie do duszej pracy akumulatora. Kiedy urzdzenie ponownie
przecza si w tryb aktywny, to poczenie z sieci bezprzewodow zostaje automatycznie odnowione. Moe to trwa kilka
sekund.
b) Lista aktualnie dostpnych sieci bezprzewodowych jest automatycznie aktualizowana.
c)
Kiedy aktywna jest funkcja sieci bezprzewodowej, to urzdzenie automatycznie czy si z ju skonfigurowan sieci, jeli znajduje
si w jej zasigu.
d) Jeli w zasigu znajduje si nieznana sie bezprzewodowa, to wywietlane jest pole informacyjne .

Pocznie rczne
Aby rcznie wyszuka dostpn sie bezprzewodow, naley postpowa nastpujco:
(1) Naley nacisn na ikon WiFi na stronie startowej albo w przegldzie aplikacji.
(2) Nastpnie naley otworzy ustawienia sieci bezprzewodowej oraz podmenu. W tym celu naley
nacisn na symbol menu
i wybra w wywietlonym menu punkt Scan.
(3) Jeli sie bezprzewodowa nie zostaa wywietlona na licie dostpnych sieci, naley przewin w d i
wybra punkt Dodaj sie bezprzewodow, aby rcznie wprowadzi SSID sieci, protok
zabezpiecze i przynalene haso. Aby potwierdzi wprowadzone dane naley nacisn na Zapisz.

e) Galeria
Nacinij krtko na ikon Galeria, aby uzyska przegld wszystkich dostpnych albumw i zdj.
Wybr galerii i nastpnie zdjcia nastpuje przez ponowne, krtkie nacinicie. Zdjcie zostanie teraz
wywietlone w trybie penoekranowym.

PL - 12

Nacinicie na symbol zdjcia


grupowania.

umoliwia wybr pomidzy rnymi moliwociami

Aby wywietli nastpne lub poprzednie zdjcie, naley po prostu


przesun biece zdjcie palcem w lewo lub prawo poza wywietlacz.

Aby bezstopniowo powikszy zdjcie, naley pooy na ekranie dotykowym


dwa palce i rozsun je. Kiedy ponownie zsuwa si palce, to zdjcie zostaje
bezstopniowo pomniejszone. Krtkie i szybkie podwjne nacinicie na
ekran dotykowy powoduje automatyczne powikszenie zdjcia, a ponowne
podwjne nacinicie wywietlenie w pierwotnej wielkoci.
Krtkie nacinicie na ekran dotykowy daje dostp do dalszych funkcji.

Nacinicie na symbol Menu


umoliwia dostp do dalszych
opcji.
Tutaj mona uruchomi pokaz slajdw, dokona obrbki zdjcia,
obraca, przycina, wybiera jako to pulpitu oraz wywietli
szczegy zdjcia.
Nacinicie na symbol kosza

powoduje usunicie zdjcia.

Nacinicie na symbol dzielenia si


zdjcia np. e-mailem.

umoliwia wysanie

f) Muzyka
Nacinij krtko na ikon Muzyka na ekranie startowym lub przegldzie aplikacji, aby otworzy
odtwarzanie muzyki.
W nastpnym widoku istnieje moliwo wyboru sortowania wywietlanych plikw muzycznych wedug
wykonawcy, albumu, tytuu listy odtwarzania lub aktualnego odtwarzania. W tym celu naley po prostu
krtko nacisn na odpowiedni symbol.
Wykonawcy

Wywietla wszystkie pliki muzyczne sortowane zgodnie z


nazwami wykonawcy.

Albumy

Wywietla wszystkie pliki muzyczne sortowane zgodnie z


nazwami albumw.

Tytu

Wywietla wszystkie pliki muzyczne sortowane wedug tytuw.

Listy odtwarzania

Wywietla utworzone listy odtwarzania.

Aktualnie odtwarzane

Przechodzi bezporednio do biecego odtwarzania.

Przez krtkie nacinicie na nazw wybranego pliku uruchamia si odtwarzanie muzyki.


PL - 13

Ekran odtwarzania
(1) Aktualnie odtwarzane
(2) Odtwarzanie losowe aktywowane/deaktywowane
(3) Opcje powtarzania:
a)
powtarzane bd wszystkie utwory
b)
powtarzany bdzie aktualny utwr
c)
powtarzanie deaktywowane
(4) Szczegy utworu
(5) Nastpny/poprzedni tytu
(6) Play / Pause
(7) Pasek czasu

Nacinicie symbolu Pause


zatrzymuje odtwarzanie.
Aby wznowi odtwarzanie, naley nacisn na symbol Play .
Nacinicie symbolu w przd wzgl. w ty /
powoduje odtworzenie poprzedniego lub
nastpnego utworu.
Nacinicie na miejsce na pasku czasu powoduje bezporednie wznowienie w tym miejscu.
Nacinicie przyciskw Gono +/- na boku urzdzenia umoliwia dopasowanie gonoci.
Aby otworzy podgld biecej listy odtwarzania, naley nacisn na symbol listy odtwarzania
. Nacinicie utworu powoduje jego bezporednie odtworzenie.
Aby zmieni tryb powtarzania, naley nacisn na symbol powtarzania .
Aby przej na ekran startowy, naley krtko nacisn przycisk Home
. Odtwarzanie muzyki
nie zostanie przez to zatrzymane. W ten sposb mona np. serfowa w Internecie za pomoc
przegldarki i jednoczenie sucha swojej muzyki. Ponowne nacinicie na ikon Muzyka
pozwala na atwe przejcie z powrotem do odtwarzania muzyki.

W trybie powtarzania mona dokona dalszych ustawie. W tym celu naley krtko nacisn na
przycisk Menu

Biblioteka wywietlony zostanie podgld wszystkich dostpnych plikw muzycznych.


Party Shuffle aktywowanie wzgl. deaktywowanie trybu Party Shuffle.
Dodaj do listy odtwarzania dodawanie aktualnie odtwarzanego utworu do listy odtwarzania.
Usu usuwanie aktualnie odtwarzanego utworu.
Efekty dwikowe ustawianie efektu dwikowego dla odtwarzanej muzyki.

g) Wideo
Nacinij krtko na ikon Wideo na ekranie startowym lub przegldzie aplikacji, aby otworzy
odtwarzanie plikw wideo.
Wywietlone zostan na licie pliki wideo. Krtkie nacinicie na wybrany plik powoduje uruchomienie
odtwarzania.

PL - 14

h) App Center
Na urzdzeniu fabrycznie zainstalowany jest AndroidPIT App Center. Tutaj mona znale rne
aplikacje, testy, blog i forum.
Dalsze wskazwki i pomoc dotyczc App Centers mona znale na stronie internetowej dostawcy pod
adresem www.androidpit.de.
Wskazwka: Ta funkcja wymaga poczenia poprzez sie bezprzewodow z Internetem.

i) Przegldarka internetowa
Aby uruchomi przegldark internetow naley nacisn na ikon Przegldarka
na ekranie
startowym.
Aby otworzy stron internetow, naley nacisn na grne pole wprowadzania adresu internetowego.
Wirtualna klawiatura otworzy si i mona wpisa adres wybranej strony internetowej. Nastpnie naley
nacisn przycisk Przejd lub symbol strzaki obok pola wprowadzania, aby otworzy t stron
internetow.
Wskazwka: Nie wszystkie sieci zapewniaj dostp do Internetu. Niektre sieci zapewniaj jedynie dostp do podczonych serwerw
lokalnych, a nie poczenie z Internetem.

Korzystanie z wirtualnej klawiatury


Aby otworzy wirtualn klawiatur naley nacisn na pole wprowadzania. Teraz mona wprowadza
tekst lub wywoa strony internetowe.
a. Caps Lock (pisanie duych i maych liter)
b. Backspace (cofnicie o jedn pozycj)
c. Wywoanie menu do wprowadzania cyfr, znakw i
znakw specjalnych
d. Spacja
e. Przejd (potwierdzenie wprowadzonych danych)

PL - 15

Wprowadzanie znakw specjalnych


Aby wprowadzi znak specjalny, np. , naley dugo nacisn palcem na klawisz a, aby wywoa menu
znakw specjalnych. Nastpnie naley przesun palec na wybrany znak specjalny, na przykad i zdj
palec z wywietlacza. Wprowadzona zostaa litera .

Korzystanie z przegldarki internetowej

Obraz wywietlany na ekranie mona przewija wykonujc palcami pionowy ruch przesunicia.
Prosz nie rozpoczyna ruchu na punkcie menu lub linku, gdy otworzy si wtedy odpowiednie
cze.
Aby otworzy link internetowy naley po prostu nacisn na ten link. Nowa strona otworzy si
automatycznie.
Aby otworzy menu przegldarki internetowej naley nacisn przycisk Menu
. Tutaj do dostpne
s rne funkcje. Midzy innymi mona tutaj aktualizowa otwart stron internetow, otworzy
now kart, zachowa stron do odczytu offline albo przej do ustawie przegldarki
internetowej.
Aby cofn si do poprzedniej strony, naley nacisn przycisk Wstecz
.
Aby cofn si bezporednio do ekranu startowego, naley nacisn przycisk Home
.
Aby wprowadzi tekst, naley nacisn na odpowiednie pole i skorzysta z wirtualnej klawiatury do
wprowadzania tekstu.

Wskazwka: Ta funkcja wymaga poczenia poprzez sie bezprzewodow z Internetem.

PL - 16

j) Przegld aplikacji
Naciskajc krtko na ikon przegldu aplikacji otwiera si przegld aplikacji. Wywietlony zostanie
przegld wszystkich aplikacji zainstalowanych fabrycznie i przez uytkownika. Wybran aplikacj
otwiera si po przez krtkie nacinicie odpowiedniej ikony.

Przegld aplikacji

k) Ustawienia systemowe
Naciskajc w menu aplikacji na ikon ustawie, wywouje si ustawienia systemowe.

Po lewej stronie menu znajduj si pojedyncze kategorie. Krtkie nacinicie wybranego punktu
menu powoduje wywietlenie dostpnych moliwoci ustawie. Naley zwrci uwag, e
ewentualnie nie wszystkie funkcje dostpne w systemie Android s kompatybilne z tym urzdzeniem.
Jeli dokonano wszystkich ustawie, to za pomoc przycisku wstecz
mona powrci do
ostatniego wywoanego menu lub przyciskiem Home
przej bezporednio do ekranu
startowego. Dokonane zmiany zostan automatycznie zapisane.

PL - 17

Przegld ustawie
Komunikacja

WiFi

Tutaj dokonuje si ustawie sieci bezprzewodowej.

bezprzewodowa i
sieci

Wicej

Tutaj mona dokona dalszych ustawie sieciowych.

Dwiki

Ustawianie gonoci i wybr dwiku powiadomienia.


Ponadto mona aktywowa wzgl. deaktywowa dwik potwierdzenia
dotknicia ekranu dotykowego oraz dwik ostrzeenia odblokowywania
ekranu.

Wywietlacz

Jasno regulacja jasnoci wywietlacza.


To Wybr ta.
Aut. obracanie wywietlacza Wczanie i wyczanie automatycznej
orientacji wywietlacza po obrceniu urzdzenia.
Stan czuwania Ustawianie opnienia automatycznego wyczania

Urzdzenie

wywietlacza.
Wielko czcionki Ustawianie wybranej wielkoci pisma.
Pami

Tutaj mona uzyska informacje o wewntrznej pamici i o ile


zainstalowana o karcie microSD. Ponadto mona usun zawarto
pamici.

Uytkownik

System

Akumulator

Tutaj uzyskuje si informacje o stanie adowania wbudowanego akumulatora.

Aplikacje

Tutaj mona zarzdza zainstalowanymi aplikacjami i otrzyma dalsze


informacje o aplikacjach.

Konta i
synchronizacja

Tutaj mona ustawi czy i jak czsto maj by synchronizowane zaoone


konta.

Lokalizacja

Tutaj mona zezwoli rnym aplikacj Android, na ustalenie aktualnej


lokalizacji w oparciu o sieci bezprzewodowe i korzystanie z tego (np. Google
Maps). Ponadto mona ustawi, czy Google moe dopasowywa do
biecej lokalizacji wyniki wyszukiwania i inne usugi.

Bezpieczestwo

Tutaj mona dokona ustawie blokady ekranu oraz innych zwizanych z


bezpieczestwem funkcji.

Jzyk i
wprowadzanie

Tutaj mona na przykad ustawi preferowany jzyk, dodawa do osobistego


sownika rne wyrazy oraz dokonywa rnych ustawie klawiatury.

Zabezpieczanie i
zerowanie

Tutaj mona zabezpieczy na serwerach Google swoje ustawienia


systemowe oraz dane aplikacji. Ponadto mona powrci do ustawie
fabrycznych. UWAGA: W tym celu usuwane s wszystkie zapisane na
urzdzeniu dane.

Data i czas

Tutaj mona ustawi dat, czas, stref czasow oraz format wywietlania.

O tablecie

Wywietlane s informacje o urzdzeniu.

PL - 18

10.) Wysyanie / odbieranie wiadomoci e-mail


Na tym urzdzeniu zainstalowana jest fabrycznie aplikacja e-mail. Uywajc jej mona korzysta z ju
istniejcego adresu e-mail, aby wysya i odbiera wiadomoci e-mail.
Wskazwka: Ta funkcja wymaga poczenia poprzez sie bezprzewodow z Internetem .

Aplikacj t otwiera si uywajc ikony e-mail, ktra znajduje si w menu aplikacji.

Konfigurowanie skrzynki e-mail


(1) Naciskajc na symbol e-mail naley uruchomi aplikacj e-mail. Wywietlona zostanie proba o
skonfigurowanie skrzynki e-mail.
(2) Naley wpisa swj adres e-mail oraz odpowiednie haso i nastpnie nacisn Dalej. Nastpnie
naley nazwa swoje konto i ustawi nazw wywietlan dla wiadomoci wychodzcych. Aby
zakoczy konfiguracj naley nacisn Gotowe. Skrzynka e-mail zostaje wybrana jako skrzynka
standardowa, jeli wybrana zostaa opcja Wiadomoci e-mail wysyaj standardowo z tego konta.
(3) Skrzynka e-mail moe by rwnie konfigurowana rcznie. W tym celu naley wprowadzi adres e-mail
i odpowiednie haso i nacisn nastpnie na Rczna konfiguracja, aby wprowadzi dane serwerw
e-mail.
(4) Naley wybra spord serwerw typu POP3, IMAP lub Exchange dla poczty przychodzcej.
Wskazwka: Jeli nie wiesz, jakie masz wybra ustawienia, to skontaktuj si z Twoim dostawc usugi e-mail, Twoim
administratorem sieci lub wyszukaj niezbdne informacje w Internecie uywajc np. poj adres POP i nazwa Twojego
dostawcy.

(5) Wprowad dane (serwer, port itd.).


(6) Teraz naley wybra typ serwera dla poczty wychodzcej i wprowadzi niezbdne dane.
(7) Aby przej dalej w menu, naley nacisn Dalej. Aplikacja e-mail sprawdzi teraz wprowadzone
ustawienia serwerw. Po udanej konfiguracji wywietlony zostanie komunikat Your account is set
up, and email is on its way. Konto jest teraz skonfigurowane.
(8) Teraz naley nazwa skrzynk pocztow i nacisn na Gotowe, aby zakoczy proces.
Wskazwka: Jeli posiadasz wicej kont e-mail, to przy kadym uruchomieniu aplikacji e-mail wywoywane bdzie konto standardowe.

PL - 19

Zarzdzanie kontami e-mail


Dodawanie nowej skrzynki pocztowej:
(1) Naley otworzy aplikacj e-mail i nacisn przycisk Menu
aby wywietli dalsze opcje. Aby
zaoy now skrzynk pocztow, naley wybra punkt menu Ustawienia i nastpnie Dodaj konto.
(2) Nastpnie naley postpowa zgodnie z poleceniami kreatora, aby zaoy now skrzynk pocztow.

Usuwanie skrzynki pocztowej:


(1) Naley otworzy aplikacj e-mail i nacisn przycisk Menu
aby wywietli dalsze opcje. Aby
zaoy usun skrzynk pocztow, naley wybra punkt menu Ustawienia i nastpnie Usu konto.

Sprawdzanie waciwoci konta:


(1) Naley otworzy aplikacj e-mail i nacisn przycisk Menu
, aby wywietli dalsze opcje oraz
naley wybra opcj Ustawienia. Po lewej stronie menu wywietlone teraz zostan wszystkie ju
zaoone skrzynki pocztowe.
(2) Aby wywietli ustawienia konta, naley nacisn na wybran skrzynk pocztow.
(3) Aby wprowadzi zmiany, naley nacisn Ustawienia konta.

Wywietlanie wiadomoci e-mail


Przez krtkie nacinicie na ikon e-mail otwiera si aplikacj e-mail. Wywietlona zostanie ju
zaoona skrzynka pocztowa.
Pionowym ruchem przesunicia mona przewija wiadomoci e-mail.
Aby otworzy konkretn wiadomo e-mail, naley krtko na ni nacisn.
Aby wywietli dodatkowe opcje naley nacisn i przytrzyma konkretn wiadomo e-mail.
Wywietlone zostanie pole informacyjne. Tutaj mona teraz otworzy, odpowied na, przesa dalej
lub usun wiadomo e-mail.

Pisanie wiadomoci e-mail


(1) W widoku oglnym e-maili naley nacisn symbol e-mail w grnym pasku menu i otwarte zostanie
nowe okno, w ktrym mona utworzy now wiadomo e-mail.
(2) Teraz naley wpisa adres e-mail odbiorcy, temat i tekst w przeznaczonych do tego polach. Mona
rwnie doda odbiorcw DW/UDW, aby wysa wiadomo do kilku uytkownikw.
(3) Aby wysa wiadomo e-mail, naley nacisn na Wylij. Naciskajc na Zapisz, zapisuje si
wiadomo e-mail jako wersj robocz. Jeli nacinie si na symbol kosza, to wprowadzana
wanie wiadomo e-mail zostanie usunita.

PL - 20

11.) Zarzdzanie aplikacjami


Aplikacje zainstalowane fabrycznie
Urzdzenie to dostarczane jest z zainstalowanymi fabrycznie aplikacjami. Przegld ju zainstalowanych
aplikacji znajduje si w przegldzie aplikacji
. Nale do nich m.in. odtwarzacz wideo, odtwarzacz
audio, przegldarka internetowa, budzik, kalkulator oraz jeszcze kilka innych. Aby otworzy te
aplikacje, naley krtko nacisn na odpowiedni ikon.

Instalacja aplikacji
Aby zainstalowa na urzdzeniu aplikacje, naley przeprowadzi nastpujce czynnoci:
(1) Pobra oprogramowanie (na przykad z Androidpit Market). Naley si przy tym upewni, e jest to plik
APK.
(2) Jeli pliki zostay pobrane na komputer, to naley poczy urzdzenie za pomoc przewodu USB z
komputerem i skopiowa pliki do wewntrznej pamici.
(3) Nastpnie naley odczy urzdzenie od komputera i otworzy eksplorator, aby otworzy
skopiowane pliki.
(4) Aby zainstalowa aplikacj, naley postpowa zgodnie z poleceniami wywietlanymi na ekranie.
(5) Po udanej instalacji nowe aplikacje mona odnale w menu aplikacji.

Odinstalowywanie aplikacji
(1) Naley otworzy Ustawienia systemu naciskajc krtko na ikon Ustawienia w przegldzie aplikacji.
(2) Teraz naley krtko nacisn na punkt menu Aplikacje, aby przej do ustawie aplikacji.
(3) Krtkim naciniciem naley wybra jeden z gwnych punktw menu: Pobieranie, Pami USB,
Aktywna i Wszystkie.
(4) Przez krtkie nacinicie naley nastpnie wybra aplikacj, ktra ma zosta odinstalowana.
(5) Naley teraz nacisn na Odinstaluj i potwierdzi wybr przyciskiem OK, aby odinstalowa z urzdzenia
dan aplikacj.
Wskazwka: Zainstalowanego fabrycznie oprogramowania nie mona usun.

PL - 21

12.) Menader plikw


Aby uruchomi menader plikw, naley otworzy przegld aplikacji i nastpnie krtko nacisn na ikon
menadera.

Nawigacja pomidzy plikami i folderami


Do wyboru dostpne s pami wewntrzna, karta pamici (jeli woona do tabletu), USB (jeli
podczona do tabletu), wszystkie dostpne pliki zdj oraz wszystkie dostpne pliki wideo.
Nacinicie na wybrane miejsce zapisu, powoduje wywietlenie listy zapisanych tam plikw,
mona rwnie nacisn na ikon plikw zdj lub wideo, aby wywietli wszystkie pliki danego
typu.
Za pomoc pionowego ruchu przesunicia mona przewija pliki i foldery. Za pomoc krtkiego
nacinicia otwiera si pliki i foldery.

Mona cofn si o krok

naciskajc krtko odpowiedni ikon.

Uywanie paska narzdzi

Przejcie bezporednio do gwnego folderu.

Pami wewntrzna

Karta micro SD (jeli woona do tabletu)

Pami USB (jeli podczona do tabletu)

Wywietla wszystkie dostpne zdjcia

Wywietla wszystkie dostpne filmy

Tutaj mona wywietli wszystkie trwajce procesy.

Edytor: Tutaj mona wkleja, usuwa, tworzy kopie lub


przenosi pliki. Nacinicie wybranego pliku powoduje
wywietlenie przed jego nazw zielonej strzaki. Nastpnie
naley wybra funkcj.

PL - 22

Kopiowanie, przenoszenie i zmiana nazwy pliku i folderu


1.)
2.)
3.)
4.)

5.)
6.)

Najpierw naley przej do wybranego pliku w podgldzie plikw.


Naley nacisn i przytrzyma palec na pliku, a wywietli si pole informacyjne.
Teraz naley wybra funkcj. Do wyboru s usuwanie pliku (Delete file), zmiana nazwy pliku,
kopiowanie pliku i przenoszenie pliku (Move File).
Aby skopiowa lub przenie, naley krtko nacisn na odpowiedni ikon (Copy/Move) i
nastpnie przej do folderu docelowego. Nastpnie naley nacisn na ikon edytora
i wybra przez krtkie nacinicie Paste, aby wklei plik.
Aby usun plik naley nacisn na Delete i potwierdzi zabezpieczenie przez ponowne
nacinicie Delete. Aby anulowa naley krtko nacisn na Cancel.
Aby zmieni nazw pliku, naley nacisn na Rename i nastpnie wpisa uywajc
wirtualnej klawiatury now nazw pliku. Wprowadzon nazw naley potwierdzi naciskajc
OK lub anulowa proces naciskajc Cancel.

13.) Przegldanie dokumentw Office


Na tym urzdzeniu jest ju fabrycznie zainstalowana aplikacja Office Suite do przegldania
dokumentw pakietu Office. Pozwala ona na przegldanie plikw Word, Excel i Powerpoint.
1.)
2.)
3.)
4.)

Skopiuj wybrane pliki pakietu Office na urzdzenie.


Otwrz aplikacj Office Suite.
Uywajc eksploratora naley przej do wybranego pliku.
Nastpnie naley wybra plik krtko na niego naciskajc i poruszajc palcem pionowo lub
poziomo po wywietlaczu mona przewija pomidzy pojedynczymi stronami. Krtko
naciskajc na przycisk Menu mona otworzy dalsze opcje. Mona na przykad wyszuka
konkretny tekst lub podliczy sowa.

PL - 23

14.) Menader zada


Urzdzenie to zdolne jest do wielozadaniowoci. Mona wic jednoczenie otworzy kilka aplikacji.
Mona na przykad sucha muzyki i w tym samym czasie serfowa w Internecie lub przeglda zdjcia.
Moe si zdarzy, e jedoczenie pracuje w tle zbyt wiele aplikacji. W tym przypadku naley otworzy
aplikacj Task Killer aby zakoczy te aplikacje, ktre s w tym momencie niepotrzebne.

(1)

Otwrz aplikacj Task Killer.

(3)

Aby potwierdzi wybr, naley krtko nacisn symbol Kill selected apps.

(2)

Wybierz zbdne w tym momencie


aplikacje.

15.) Warunki ograniczonej gwarancji


Gwarancja obejmuje wycznie wymian niniejszego produktu firmy Intenso. Gwarancja nie obejmuje
normalnych objaww zuycia, ktre s wynikiem niewaciwego, nieprawidowego uytkowania,
niestarannoci, wypadku, niekompatybilnoci lub jest wynikiem niewystarczajcej wydajnoci konkretnego
sprztu lub oprogramowania komputerowego.
Roszczenia gwarancyjne nie obejmuj przypadkw wynikajcych z niestosowania si do Instrukcji obsugi
firmy Intenso oraz nieprawidowego montau, uytkowania lub uszkodzenia spowodowanego przez inne
urzdzenie.
Jeli produkt poddany zosta wstrzsom, wyadowaniom elektrycznym, temperaturze i wilgotnoci spoza
zakresu specyfikacji produktu, to brak jest podstaw do roszcze gwarancyjnych.
Firma Intenso nie odpowiada za utrat danych lub jakiekolwiek szkody towarzyszce lub nastpstwa, za
przekroczenie warunkw gwarancji lub inne szkody bez wzgldu na ich powd.
Produkt ten nie jest przeznaczony do wykorzystania komercyjnego lub zastosowa medycznych i
specjalnych, w przypadku ktrych awaria produktu moe spowodowa zranienia, mier lub znaczne szkody
materialne.

PL - 24

16.) Dane techniczne


CPU
Pami operacyjna
System operacyjny
Kompatybilne systemy
operacyjne
Moliwoci podcze
Sie bezprzewodowa
Czujnik przecienia
Format zdj
Format audio
Format wideo
Wywietlacz
Kamera
SNR
Zakres czstotliwoci
Zasilacz
Akumulator wewntrzny

1 GHz Cortex A8
512 MB DDR 3
Android 4.0.4
Windows XP / Vista / 7 / Linux 2,4 lub nowszy / Mac 10.6 lub nowszy
Suchawki, micro SD (SDHC), micro USB
WiFi (802.11 b/g/n)
obrt 360 stopni
JPEG, BMP, GIF, PNG
MP3, WMA, WAV, OGG, FLAC, APE
MPEG1, MPEG 4, FLV
wywietlacz TFT LCD, 800 x 480 pikseli
przednia kamera 0,3 MP
>= 80 dB
20 Hz 20 KHz
(V) AC Adapter(Ktec KSAS0100500200HE): AC Input 100-240V50/60Hz,
DC Output 5V / 2A
akumulator litowo-polimerowy

17.) Konserwacja urzdzenia


Nie wolno pryska lub nanosi pynu bezporednio na wywietlacz lub obudow.

18.) Czyszczenie urzdzenia


Obudow, ramk i wywietlacz ostronie przetrze mikk, niekaczc i woln
od substancji chemicznych szmatk. Uywa wycznie rodkw czyszczcych
przeznaczonych specjalnie dla wywietlaczy.

19.) Utylizacja zuytych urzdze elektrycznych


Urzdzenia oznaczone tym symbolem podlegaj europejskiej
dyrektywie 2002/96/WE.
Wszystkie urzdzenie elektrycznie i elektroniczne musz by
utylizowane niezalenie od odpadw komunalnych, przez
wyznaczone do tego instytucje.
Poprzez prawidow utylizacj zuytych urzdze elektronicznych
zapobiega si skaeniu rodowiska naturalnego.

PL - 25

20.) Licencja informacja


Notice of GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE and LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENCE
Dear Customer,
If interested, you and any third party can download the source code of used GPL / LGPL from Intenso
Webpage http://www.intenso.de . The source code of the desired product is available to anyone on the
selection of valid product category and the desired device. In the product details you will find the entry
"drivers". Open this menu to download the corresponding GPL / LGPL code. For a fee of 35 (delivery to
another country as Germany), it is also possible to obtain this code by postal delivery. More information
about the GPL/LGPL-Licence can you nd on following website www.gnu.org
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast,
the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software-to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free
Software Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other
Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Lesser General Public License instead.) You can
apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are
designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this
service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the
software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you
to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of
the software, or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the
recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code.
And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives
you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.
Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is
no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its
recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not
reflect on the original authors' reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that
redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program
proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use
or not licensed at all.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder
saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below, refers to
any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" means either the Program or any derivative
work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or
with modifications and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without
limitation in the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you".
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside
its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if
its contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made by running the
Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any
PL - 26

medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright
notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of
any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty
protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the
Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided
that you also meet all of these conditions:
a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the
date of any change.
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from
the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of
this License.
c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when started
running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an
appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a
warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the user how to
view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an
announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not
derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as
separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the
Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other
licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you;
rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on
the Program.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work
based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under
the scope of this License.
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or
executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed
under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge no
more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the
corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium
customarily used for software interchange; or,
c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code.
(This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object
code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an
executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the
executable. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is
normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on)
of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the
executable.
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then
offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source
code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this
License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will
automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights,
from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full
compliance.
5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants
you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by
PL - 27

law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based
on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for
copying, distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it.
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatically
receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms
and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted
herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License.
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not
limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise)
that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If
you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other
pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a
patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies
directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance
of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to
contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free
software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made
generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent
application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software
through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this
License.
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by
copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an
explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in
or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in
the body of this License.
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public License
from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this
License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions
either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does
not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free
Software Foundation.
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are
different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software
Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will
be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of
promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE
PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE
STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE
PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE,
YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY
COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE
PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL,
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO
USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED
INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE
PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER
PL - 28

PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.


END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way
to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source
file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the "copyright"
line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
one line to give the program's name and an idea of what it does.
Copyright (C) yyyy name of author
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
GNU General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode:
Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author
Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details
type `show w'. This is free software, and you are welcome
to redistribute it under certain conditions; type `show c'
for details.
The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate parts of the General Public
License. Of course, the commands you use may be called something other than `show w' and `show c'; they
could even be mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a "copyright
disclaimer" for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright
interest in the program `Gnomovision'
(which makes passes at compilers) written
by James Hacker.
signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1989
Ty Coon, President of Vice

PL - 29

Intenso GmbH
Data:12 lipiec 2013

Deklaracja zgodnoci UE
My, Intenso GmbH,
z siedzib Diepholzer Str. 15 w 49377 Vechta, Niemcy
deklarujemy na wadn odpowiedzialno, e produkt:
Model: 7 TAB 714 (artyku nr 5509852)
Opis: komputer typu tablet
jest zgodny z nastpujcymi dyrektywami i normami:
Dyrektywa R&TTE 1999/5/WE
EN 301 489-1 V1.9.2
EN 301 489-17 V2.1.1
EN 300 328 V1.7.1 : 2006-10
EN 55022:2010 (Class B)
EN 55024:2010
EN 61000-3-2:2006+A1 :2009+A2 :2009 (Class D)
EN 61000-3-3:2008
Dyrektywa niskonapiciowa 2006/95/WE
EN 60950-1:2006+A11:2009+A1:2010+A12:2011+A12:korekta 2012
Dyrektywa w sprawie ekoprojektu 2009/125/EG
1275/2008
278/2009
Dyrektywa ROHS 2011/65/EU
Dokumentacja techniczna dotyczca wyej wymienionego urzdzenia zostaa zoona w
nastpujcym miejscu:
Intenso GmbH
Diepholzer Str. 15, 49377 Vechta, Niemcy
Osoba upowaniona:

____________________________
Zarzdzajcy przedsibiorstwem: Thomas Phlking

PL - 30

TAB 714
, TAB714. ,
.

1.)
1.) .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 1
2.) .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 2
3.) ................................................................................................................................................................................. 4
4.) .......................................................................................................................................................................... 4
5.) ......................................................................................................................................................................... 5
6.) MICRO SD/SDHC ............................................................................................................................................ 5
7.) . ...................................................................................................................... 5
8.) ................................................................................................................................................................................. 6
9.) ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 7
............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 7
.......................................................................................................................................................................... 7
...................................................................................................................................................................................... 8
.......................................................................................................................................................... 8
............................................................................................................................................... 9
.......................................................................................................................... 9
a) Google ............................................................................................................................................................... 10
b) .............................................................................................................................................................................. 10
c) ................................................................................................................................................................................... 11
d) WIFI ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 11
.................................................................................................................................................................. 11
............................................................................................................................................................. 12
e) ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 12
f) .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 13
g) ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 14
h) .............................................................................................................................................................................. 15
i) ................................................................................................................................................................................. 15
............................................................................................................................................. 15
...................................................................................................................................................................... 16
....................................................................................................................................................... 16
j) ............................................................................................................................................................................... 17
k) ......................................................................................................................................................................... 17
....................................................................................................................................................................................... 18
10.) / ............................................................................................................................................ 19
...................................................................................................................................................... 19
........................................................................................................................... 20
, . ...................... 20
E-Mail................................................................................................................................................................ 20
.............................................................................................................................................................. 20
11.) ............................................................................................................................................................. 21
........................................................................................................................................... 21
. ........................................................................................................................................................................... 21
12.) ........................................................................................................................................................................... 22
........................................................................................................................................................................... 22
................................................................................................................................................... 22
, ....................................................................................................... 23
13.) Office ................................................................................................................................................................ 23
14.) ...................................................................................................................................................... 24
15.) ................................................................................................................................................... 24
16.) ........................................................................................................................................................................ 25
17.) .............................................................................................................................................................. 25
18.) ......................................................................................................................................................................... 25
19.) .................................................................................................................................... 25
20.) ..................................................................................................................................................................... 26
................................................................................................................................................... 30

RUS - 1

.
, , . ,
. www.intenso.de

Google, Google Android Google.
.

2.)

.
, .

, ,
. .

, ,
. .

.
.


. .

.
.

. ,
.

.
.

,
.

,
, .

, ,
.

, .

,
.
RUS - 2

AC 100-240~,
50/60 . ,
.


. .
.

.
.
.

,
.

,
. .

, .
, ..
.

,
.. .
15 .

.

,
.

-
.

RUS - 3

3.)

1.) / :
;

5.) Micro SD

2.) 3.5mm

8.)

6.) +/7.)

3.) Micro USB


4.) DC 5V 2A

4.)
:

TAB 714
Stereo
USB
5 2.0A

USB Dongle

RUS - 4

5.)
, , .
.
5 .
.
.

.
. ,

:
a. 15.
.
.
b. .
.
c. , .
, , .
d. ,
.

6.) MICRO SD/SDHC


Micro SD/SDHC.
Micro SD/SDHC ,
(I).
( .
). SD Card .

7.) .
1.) USB .
2.) USB.
USB.
USB . Home
.
,
.
3.) USB-
USB. (
)
USB-.

RUS - 5

USB-.

: Android
1 . .

8.)
.
.
, ,
.
, , .
,
, .
.
, .


. .
:
a.
,
. / .
b.

. .

. ,
. .

,
. ,
.

RUS - 6

9.)


,
. . / ., ,
. .

. ,
, . .

: .
.

RUS - 7


.
:

WLAN


WIFI

.
.
, ,
.

.
, X.
, .
, ,
, .
. .
.
, , ,
.
.
-
, .
. , .
, .

, .

RUS - 8


.
, .

Home


:
-

Google

Browser

E-Mail

AndroidPIT (App Center) (Android )

A Google
B
C
D
E , ,
,
, Wlan (
),

RUS - 9

a) Google

Google.
.
Google.
.
, .
. ,
Google.

:
,
.
.

: WLAN.

b)

.
. .

RUS - 10

c)
,
, ,
.
, , ,
. .


: WLAN.

d) WIFI
WIFI.
WIFI , WIFI .
: WLAN


WIFI, WIFI
. WIFI.
. WIFI.
..
WIFI .

WIFI ,
.

RUS - 11

Enter,
. .
:
a) , WLAN .
.
, . .
b) WLAN .
c)
WLAN ,
.
d) WLAN, .



:
(1) .
(2) .
(3) , ,
, SSID, ,
, .
.

e)
, .
.
.

RUS - 12

,

.


, ,
.
, .
,
. ,
.
, .


,
, , ,

.

.
, ,

f)

.
,
, , .
.

..


.
RUS - 13


(1)
(2)

(3) :
a)

b)

c)

(4)
(5) /
(6) /
(7)


.
.
/ / ,
.

.
+/-,
.
, ,

. ,
.
.

, Home
.
.
. ,
.
.


Party Shuffle - .
.
.

g)

.
.
.

RUS - 14

h)
AndroidPIT .
, , .

App Centers / , ,
www.androidpit.de.
: WLAN.

i)


.

.
. ,
,
.
: .
.


.
.
a. Caps Lock ( )
b.
c. ,
.
d. Space Taste ( )
e. Los ( )

RUS - 15


, , a
.
, , .
.

.
. ,
.
, , .
.
-,
.
. -,
, - .
,
.
, Home
.

.

: WLAN.

RUS - 16

j)
, .
.
.

k)
.

.
. , ,
, , Android, .
,
,
,

. , , .

RUS - 17


.
/ -
-

, ,
. ,

Android
(,
Google ). /
Google

, ,


Google
. : ,
,

, ,

RUS - 18

10.) /
.
,
.
: WLAN.

E-Mail, .


(1) E-Mail E-Mail.
.
(2) .
, .
.
,
.
(3) .
.
.
(4) POP3, IMAP Exchange
.
: ,
, POP
.

(5) (, .).
(6) . .
(7) .
.
,
. .
(8) , .
: , ,
.

RUS - 19


:
(1) Email

.
.
(2) .

:
(1) Email

.
.

:
(1) Email

, .
.
(2) .
,
.

E-Mail
E-Mail, .
.

.
.
,
. .
, , .


(1) Email Email ,
.
(2) , .
/ .
(1) .
, .
.
RUS - 20

11.)

.

. ,
, , , .
, .


, , ,
:
(1) ( Androidpit Market).
APK.
(2) ,
USB
.
(3)
.
(4)
.
(5) .

.
(1) , .
(2) , .
(3)
, USB-, , .
(4) , .
(5) , OK,
.
: .

RUS - 21

12.)
, ,
.


, ( ),
USB ( ), ,
.

, .
.
.

, .

Micro SD ( )

USB - ( )


.
: (paste),
, .
,
.
.
RUS - 22

,
1.)
2.)
3.)
4.)

5.)
6.)

.
, .
. : (Delete file),
, (Move File),
,
(Copy/Move) .
Past, .
, Delete :
. .

.
.

13.) Office
Office Suite Office.
Word, Excel, Powerpoint.
1.)
2.)
3.)
4.)

.
Office Suite.
.


. .
.

RUS - 23

14.)
.
.
.
, . ,
, Task Killer ,
.

(1)

Advanced
Task Killer.

(3)


selected apps
.

(2)

,

.

Kill

15.)
.
,
, , ,

, .

,
.
- ,
, .

, .
RUS - 24

,
, ,
.

16.)
CPU


WLAN
G-


SNR


1 Cortex A8
512 MB DDR 3
Android 4.0.4
Windows XP / Vista / 7 / Linux 2,4 / Mac 10.6
, Micro SD (SDHC), Micro USB
WiFi (802.11 b/g/n)
360
JPEG, BMP, GIF, PNG
MP3, WMA, WAV, OGG, FLAC, APE
MPEG1, MPEG 4, FLV
TFT LCD , 800 x 480
0,3 ,
>= 80 dB
20 20
(V) AC (Ktec KSAS0100500200HE): AC
100-240V50/60, DC 5V / 2A
Lithium-Ionen Polymer

17.)

.
.

18.)
, , ,
. ,
.

19.)

2002/96/.


.

.

RUS - 25

20.)
Notice of GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE and LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENCE
Dear Customer,
If interested, you and any third party can download the source code of used GPL / LGPL from Intenso
Webpage http://www.intenso.de . The source code of the desired product is available to anyone on the
selection of valid product category and the desired device. In the product details you will find the entry
"drivers". Open this menu to download the corresponding GPL / LGPL code. For a fee of 35 (delivery to
another country as Germany), it is also possible to obtain this code by postal delivery. More information
about the GPL/LGPL-Licence can you nd on following website www.gnu.org
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast,
the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software-to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free
Software Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other
Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Lesser General Public License instead.) You can
apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are
designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this
service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the
software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you
to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of
the software, or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the
recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code.
And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives
you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.
Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is
no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its
recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not
reflect on the original authors' reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that
redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program
proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use
or not licensed at all.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder
saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below, refers to
any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" means either the Program or any derivative
work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or
with modifications and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without
limitation in the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you".
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside
its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if
its contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made by running the
Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any
RUS - 26

medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright
notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of
any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty
protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the
Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided
that you also meet all of these conditions:
a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the
date of any change.
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from
the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of
this License.
c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when started
running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an
appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a
warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the user how to
view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an
announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not
derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as
separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the
Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other
licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you;
rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on
the Program.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work
based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under
the scope of this License.
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or
executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed
under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge no
more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the
corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium
customarily used for software interchange; or,
c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code.
(This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object
code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an
executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the
executable. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is
normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on)
of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the
executable.
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then
offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source
code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this
License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will
automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights,
from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full
compliance.
5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants
you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by
RUS - 27

law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based
on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for
copying, distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it.
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatically
receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms
and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted
herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License.
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not
limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise)
that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If
you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other
pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a
patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies
directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance
of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to
contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free
software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made
generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent
application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software
through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this
License.
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by
copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an
explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in
or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in
the body of this License.
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public License
from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this
License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions
either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does
not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free
Software Foundation.
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are
different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software
Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will
be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of
promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE
PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE
STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE
PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE,
YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY
COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE
PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL,
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO
USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED
INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE
PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER
RUS - 28

PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.


END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way
to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source
file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the "copyright"
line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
one line to give the program's name and an idea of what it does.
Copyright (C) yyyy name of author
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
GNU General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode:
Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author
Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details
type `show w'. This is free software, and you are welcome
to redistribute it under certain conditions; type `show c'
for details.
The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate parts of the General Public
License. Of course, the commands you use may be called something other than `show w' and `show c'; they
could even be mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a "copyright
disclaimer" for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright
interest in the program `Gnomovision'
(which makes passes at compilers) written
by James Hacker.
signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1989
Ty Coon, President of Vice

RUS - 29


:12.07.2013.


, ,
, , 15,
, :
: 7 TAB 714 ( 5509852)
: -
:
R&TTE 1999/5/

EN 301 489-1 V1.9.2

EN 301 489-17 V2.1.1

EN 300 328 V1.7.1 : 2006-10

EN 55022:2010 (Class B)

EN 55024:2010

EN 61000-3-2:2006+A1 :2009+A2 :2009 (Class D)

EN 61000-3-3:2008
2006/95/

EN 60950-1:2006+A11:2009+A1:2010+A12:2011+A12: 2012
2009/125/

1275/2008

278/2009
ROHS 2011/65/EU

:

15, 49377 ,
:

___________________________________
:

RUS - 30